diff options
| author | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2019-11-13 23:26:16 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Karl Berry <karl@freefriends.org> | 2019-11-13 23:26:16 +0000 |
| commit | 050a0305d90f80893fe1f608d62be90df384d15d (patch) | |
| tree | 506d9c03887468dd12678367ba1ee13bc3a1cbf7 /Master | |
| parent | de3984078547ca7aa18e0b77c0a98f5da1548a84 (diff) | |
plainyr.bst own package; others obsolete on ctan or otherwise old
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@52783 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master')
19 files changed, 5 insertions, 24889 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/named.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/named.bst deleted file mode 100644 index 78b6bb6eb35..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/named.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1287 +0,0 @@ -%NAME: named.bst -% BibTeX `named' style file for BibTeX version 0.99c, LaTeX version 2.09 -% Place it in a file called named.bst in the BibTeX search path. (Placing it -% in the same directory as the LaTeX document should also work.) -% Support for named citations is provided by named.sty - -% This version was made by modifying the master file made by -% Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) - -% Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. -% Modifications Copyright 1988, Peter F. Patel-Schneider -% Copying of this file is authorized only if either -% (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or -% (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than -% btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. -% This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. - -% There are undoubtably bugs in this style. If you make bug fixes, -% improvements, etc. please let me know. My e-mail address is: -% pfps@research.att.com - -% Citation format: [author-last-name, year] -% [author-last-name and author-last-name, year] -% [author-last-name {\em et al.}, year] -% -% Reference list ordering: alphabetical by author or whatever passes -% for author in the absence of one. -% -% This BibTeX style has support for short (year only) citations. This -% is done by having the citations actually look like -% \citeauthoryear{author-info}{year} -% The LaTeX style has to have the following (or similar) -% \let\@internalcite\cite -% \def\cite{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2{##1, ##2}\@internalcite} -% \def\shortcite{\def\citeauthoryear##1{##2}\@internalcite} -% \def\@biblabel#1{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2{##1, ##2}[#1]\hfill} -% which makes \shortcite the macro for short citations. - -ENTRY - { address - author - booktitle - chapter - edition - editor - howpublished - institution - journal - key - month - note - number - organization - pages - publisher - school - series - title - type - volume - year - } - {} - { label extra.label sort.label } - -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } - -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} - -STRINGS { s t } - -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { add.period$ write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} - -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - - "\bibitem[" write$ - label write$ - "]{" write$ - - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} - -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ output.state after.block = - 'skip$ - { output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.sentence 'output.state := } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.block.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} - -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } - -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - - { s nameptr "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := - - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { numnames #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { ", editors" * } - { ", editor" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - - { title "t" change.case$ } - - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.date} -{ year empty$ - { month empty$ - { "" } - { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ - month - } - if$ - } - { month empty$ - 'year - { month " " * year * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title emphasize -} - -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} - -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -INTEGERS { multiresult } - -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} - -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check - { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null - number empty$ - 'skip$ - { "(" number * ")" * * - volume empty$ - { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages } - { ":" * pages n.dashify * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "In " booktitle emphasize * } - { "In " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} -{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ - month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ - and and and and and - - key empty$ not and - - { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "Technical Report" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ key empty$ - { journal empty$ - { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * - warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " journal * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - " \shortcite{" * crossref * "}" * -} - -FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} -{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ - editor num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { series empty$ - { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" * - } - { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { key * } - if$ - } - { format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \shortcite{" * crossref * "}" * -} - -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { booktitle empty$ - { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - } - { "In " format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \shortcite{" * crossref * "}" * -} - -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal emphasize "journal" output.check - format.vol.num.pages output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - howpublished address new.block.checkb - howpublished output - address output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address empty$ - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - organization output - publisher output - } - if$ - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } - -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output.nonnull - address output - } - if$ - } - { format.authors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { address new.block.checka - address output - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - { organization address new.block.checkb - organization output - address output - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - title howpublished new.block.checkb - format.title output - howpublished new.block.checka - howpublished output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry - empty.misc.check -} - -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - editor empty$ - { organization output } - { format.editors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address empty$ - { editor empty$ - { publisher new.sentence.checka } - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - } - if$ - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - editor empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output } - if$ - publisher output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - format.tr.number output.nonnull - institution "institution" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - format.date output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } - -MACRO {jan} {"January"} - -MACRO {feb} {"February"} - -MACRO {mar} {"March"} - -MACRO {apr} {"April"} - -MACRO {may} {"May"} - -MACRO {jun} {"June"} - -MACRO {jul} {"July"} - -MACRO {aug} {"August"} - -MACRO {sep} {"September"} - -MACRO {oct} {"October"} - -MACRO {nov} {"November"} - -MACRO {dec} {"December"} - -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} - -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} - -MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} - -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} - -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} - -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} - -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} - -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} - -MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} - -MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} - -MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} - -MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} - -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} - -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} - -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} - -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} - -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} - -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} - -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} - -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} - -READ - -FUNCTION {sortify} -{ purify$ - "l" change.case$ -} - -INTEGERS { len } - -FUNCTION {chop.word} -{ 's := - 'len := - s #1 len substring$ = - { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } - 's - if$ -} - -INTEGERS { et.al.char.used } - -FUNCTION {initialize.et.al.char.used} -{ #0 'et.al.char.used := -} - -EXECUTE {initialize.et.al.char.used} - -FUNCTION {format.lab.names} -{ 's := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - - numnames #1 = - { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ } - { numnames #2 = - { s #1 "{vv }{ll }and " format.name$ s #2 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ * - } - { s #1 "{vv }{ll }\bgroup \em et al.\egroup " format.name$ } - if$ - } - if$ - -} - -FUNCTION {author.key.label} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - - { key } - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} -{ author empty$ - { editor empty$ - { key empty$ - - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - - { key } - if$ - } - { editor format.lab.names } - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { organization empty$ - - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - - { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { key } - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label} -{ editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { organization empty$ - - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - - { "The " #4 organization chop.word #3 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { key } - if$ - } - { editor format.lab.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {calc.label} -{ type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.key.label - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.key.organization.label - { type$ "manual" = - 'author.key.organization.label - 'author.key.label - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ - duplicate$ - - "\protect\citeauthoryear{" swap$ * "}{" * - year field.or.null purify$ * % CHANGED - pfps - 15 Feb 1989 - 'label := - year field.or.null purify$ * - - sortify 'sort.label := -} - -FUNCTION {sort.format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - "" - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { nameptr #1 > - { " " * } - 'skip$ - if$ - - s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ ff{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := - - nameptr numnames = t "others" = and - { "et al" * } - { t sortify * } - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} - -FUNCTION {sort.format.title} -{ 't := - "A " #2 - "An " #3 - "The " #4 t chop.word - chop.word - chop.word - sortify - #1 global.max$ substring$ -} - -FUNCTION {author.sort} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} -{ author empty$ - { editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { editor sort.format.names } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {author.organization.sort} -{ author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort} -{ editor empty$ - { organization empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } - if$ - } - { editor sort.format.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {presort} - -{ calc.label - sort.label - " " - * - type$ "book" = - - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.sort - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.organization.sort - { type$ "manual" = - 'author.organization.sort - 'author.sort - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ - - * - - " " - * - year field.or.null sortify - * - " " - * - title field.or.null - sort.format.title - * - #1 entry.max$ substring$ - 'sort.key$ := -} - -ITERATE {presort} - -SORT - -STRINGS { longest.label last.sort.label next.extra } - -INTEGERS { longest.label.width last.extra.num } - -FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} -{ "" 'longest.label := - #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label := - "" 'next.extra := - #0 'longest.label.width := - #0 'last.extra.num := -} - -FUNCTION {forward.pass} -{ last.sort.label sort.label = - { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := - last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := - } - { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := - "" 'extra.label := - sort.label 'last.sort.label := - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {reverse.pass} -{ next.extra "b" = - { "a" 'extra.label := } - 'skip$ - if$ - label extra.label * "}" * 'label := % CHANGED - pfps 15 Feb 1989 - label width$ longest.label.width > - { label 'longest.label := - label width$ 'longest.label.width := - } - 'skip$ - if$ - extra.label 'next.extra := -} - -EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} - -ITERATE {forward.pass} - -REVERSE {reverse.pass} - -FUNCTION {begin.bib} - -{ et.al.char.used - { "\newcommand{\etalchar}[1]{$^{#1}$}" write$ newline$ } - 'skip$ - if$ - preamble$ empty$ - - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - - "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ - -} - -EXECUTE {begin.bib} - -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} - -ITERATE {call.type$} - -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} - -EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/namunsrt.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/namunsrt.bst deleted file mode 100644 index 8c04e10fbcf..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/namunsrt.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,949 +0,0 @@ -% BibTeX standard bibliography style `unsrt' - % version 0.99a for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. - % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. - % Copying of this file is authorized only if either - % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or - % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than - % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. - % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. - % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. - -ENTRY - { address - author - booktitle - chapter - edition - editor - howpublished - institution - journal - key - month - nam - note - number - organization - pages - publisher - school - series - title - type - volume - year - } - {} - { label } - -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } - -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} - -STRINGS { s t } - -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { add.period$ write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} - -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - "\bibitem[" write$ - nam write$ - "]{" write$ - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} - -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ output.state after.block = - 'skip$ - { output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.sentence 'output.state := } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.block.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} - -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } - -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { numnames #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { ", editors" * } - { ", editor" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - { title "t" change.case$ } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.date} -{ year empty$ - { month empty$ - { "" } - { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ - month - } - if$ - } - { month empty$ - 'year - { month " " * year * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title emphasize -} - -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} - -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -INTEGERS { multiresult } - -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} - -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check - { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null - number empty$ - 'skip$ - { "(" number * ")" * * - volume empty$ - { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages } - { ":" * pages n.dashify * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "In " booktitle emphasize * } - { "In " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} -{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ - month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ - and and and and and - { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "NAM" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ key empty$ - { journal empty$ - { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * - warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " journal * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} - -FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} -{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ - editor num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { series empty$ - { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" * - } - { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { key * } - if$ - } - { format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} - -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { booktitle empty$ - { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - } - { "In " format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} - -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal emphasize "journal" output.check - format.vol.num.pages output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - howpublished address new.block.checkb - howpublished output - address output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address empty$ - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - organization output - publisher output - } - if$ - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } - -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output.nonnull - address output - } - if$ - } - { format.authors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { address new.block.checka - address output - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - { organization address new.block.checkb - organization output - address output - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - title howpublished new.block.checkb - format.title output - howpublished new.block.checka - howpublished output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry - empty.misc.check -} - -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - editor empty$ - { organization output } - { format.editors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address empty$ - { editor empty$ - { publisher new.sentence.checka } - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - } - if$ - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - editor empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output } - if$ - publisher output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - format.date output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } - -MACRO {jan} {"January"} - -MACRO {feb} {"February"} - -MACRO {mar} {"March"} - -MACRO {apr} {"April"} - -MACRO {may} {"May"} - -MACRO {jun} {"June"} - -MACRO {jul} {"July"} - -MACRO {aug} {"August"} - -MACRO {sep} {"September"} - -MACRO {oct} {"October"} - -MACRO {nov} {"November"} - -MACRO {dec} {"December"} - -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} - -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} - -MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} - -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} - -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} - -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} - -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} - -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} - -MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} - -MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} - -MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} - -MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} - -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} - -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} - -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} - -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} - -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} - -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} - -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} - -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} - -READ - -STRINGS { longest.label } - -INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } - -FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} -{ "" 'longest.label := - #1 'number.label := - #0 'longest.label.width := -} - -FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} -{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := - number.label #1 + 'number.label := - label width$ longest.label.width > - { label 'longest.label := - label width$ 'longest.label.width := - } - 'skip$ - if$ -} - -EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} - -ITERATE {longest.label.pass} - -FUNCTION {begin.bib} -{ preamble$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ -} - -EXECUTE {begin.bib} - -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} - -ITERATE {call.type$} - -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} - -EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/newapa.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/newapa.bst deleted file mode 100644 index 2a0d1481397..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/newapa.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1468 +0,0 @@ -%$$$ newapa.bst $$$ -% BibTeX `newapa' style file for BibTeX version 0.99c, LaTeX version 2.09 -% Place it in a file called newapa.bst in the BibTeX search path. -%(Placing it in the same directory as the LaTeX document should also work.) -% Support for named citations is provided by named.sty - -% This version was made by modifying the master file made by -% Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU), and the 'named' BibTeX -% style of Peter F. Patel-Schneider. - -% Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. -% Copying of this file is authorized only if either -% (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or -% (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than 'newapa.bst'. -% There are undoubtably bugs in this style. If you make bug fixes, -% improvements, etc. please let me know. My e-mail address is: -% spencer@cgrg.ohio.state.edu or 71160.3141@compuserve.com -% -% This style was made from 'plain.bst', 'named.bst', and 'apalike.bst', -% with lots of tweaking to make it look like APA style, along with tips -% from Young Ryu and Brian Reiser's modifications of 'apalike.bst'. -% -% Citation format: (author-last-name, year) -% (author-last-name and author-last-name, year) -% (author-last-name {\em et al.}, year) -% (author-last-name) -% (author-last-name and author-last-name) -% (author-last-name {\em et al.}) -% (year) -% -% Reference list ordering: alphabetical by author or whatever passes -% for author in the absence of one. -% -% This BibTeX style has support for abbreviated author lists and for -% year-only citations. This is done by having the citations -% actually look like -% -% \citeauthoryear{full-author-info}{abbrev-author-info}{year} -% -% The LaTeX style has to have the following (or similar) -% -% \let\@internalcite\cite -% \def\fullcite{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##1, ##3}\@internalcite} -% \def\fullciteA{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##1}\@internalcite} -% \def\shortcite{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##2, ##3}\@internalcite} -% \def\shortciteA{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##2}\@internalcite} -% \def\citeyear{\def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{##3}\@internalcite} -% - -ENTRY - { address - author - booktitle - chapter - edition - editor - howpublished - institution - journal - key -% month - note - number - organization - pages - publisher - school - series - title - type - volume - year - } - {} - { label extra.label sort.label } - -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } - -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} - -STRINGS { s t u } - -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { add.period$ write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} - -FUNCTION {special.output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { " " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { ": " write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { ": " * write$ - } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} - -FUNCTION {output.nonnull.colon} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ": " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { add.period$ write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} - -FUNCTION {output.nonnull.space} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { "\ " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { add.period$ write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} - -FUNCTION {special.output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'special.output.nonnull - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {output.check.colon} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull.colon - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {output.check.space} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull.space - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {output.year.check} -{ year empty$ - { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ } - { write$ - " (" year * extra.label * ")" * - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - - "\bibitem[" write$ - label write$ - "]{" write$ - - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} - -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ output.state after.block = - 'skip$ - { output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.sentence 'output.state := } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.block.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {underline} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "\underline{" swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {emphasize.space} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "\/}" * } - if$ -} - -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } - -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := % nameptr = 1; - s num.names$ 'numnames := % numnames = num.name$(s); - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - - { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := - - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { numnames #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - { " et~al." * } -% { " and " * t * } -% { ", \& " * t * } - { " \& " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := % nameptr += 1; - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := % namesleft =- 1; - } - while$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.names.fml} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := % nameptr = 1; - s num.names$ 'numnames := % numnames = num.name$(s); - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - - { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := - - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { numnames #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - { " et~al." * } -% { " and " * t * } - { " \& " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := % nameptr += 1; - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := % namesleft =- 1; - } - while$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.key} -{ empty$ - { key field.or.null } - { "" } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.editors.fml} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names.fml - editor num.names$ #1 > - { " (Eds.)" * } - { " (Ed.)" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { " (Eds.)" * } - { " (Ed.)" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.editors.dot} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { " (Eds.)." * } - { " (Ed.)." * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - { title "t" change.case$ } - if$ -} - -% Note that the APA style requres case changes -% in article titles. The following does not -% change cases. If you perfer it, uncomment the -% following and comment out the above. - -%FUNCTION {format.title} -%{ title empty$ -% { "" } -% { title } -% if$ -%} - -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ edition empty$ - { title emphasize } - { title empty$ - { title emphasize } - { "{\em " title * "\/} (" * edition * " ed.)" * "." * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.emphasize.booktitle} -{ edition empty$ - { booktitle emphasize } - { booktitle empty$ - { booktitle emphasize } - { "{\em " booktitle * "\/} (" * edition * " ed.)" * "." * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} - -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -INTEGERS { multiresult } - -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} - -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check -% { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } -% { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } - { "(pp.\" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "(pp.\" pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - ")." * - } - if$ -} - -% By Young (and Spencer) -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ number empty$ - { volume empty$ - 'skip$ - { "{\em " volume * "}" * } -% { "\underline{" volume * "}" * } - if$ - } - { volume emphasize.space - number empty$ - {"there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } - { "(" number * ")" * * } - if$ - } - if$ - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages } - { ", " * pages n.dashify * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages.incoll} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { " " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "In " format.emphasize.booktitle * } - { "In " format.editors * ", " * format.emphasize.booktitle * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle.incoll} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "In " format.emphasize.booktitle * } - { "In " format.editors.fml * ", " * format.emphasize.booktitle * } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "Technical Report" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ "In" - "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} - -FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} -{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ - editor num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { series empty$ - { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" * - } - { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { key * } - if$ - } - { format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} - -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ "In" - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} - -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors - "author" output.check - author format.key output % added - output.year.check % added - new.block - format.title - "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal emphasize "journal" output.check - format.vol.num.pages output - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors.dot - "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors - output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - output.year.check % added - new.block - format.btitle - "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - address output - publisher "publisher" output.check.colon - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ -% format.edition output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - author format.key output % added - output.year.check % added - new.block - format.title - "title" output.check - new.block - howpublished output - address output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors.dot - "author and editor" output.check - } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - output.year.check % added - new.block - format.btitle - "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages - "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - address output - publisher - "publisher" output.check.colon - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ -% format.edition output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors - "author" output.check - author format.key output % added - output.year.check % added - new.block - format.title - "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle.incoll - "booktitle" output.check.colon - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages special.output - new.sentence - address output - publisher "publisher" output.check.colon - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref - output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors - "author" output.check - author format.key output % added - output.year.check % added - new.block - format.title - "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle - "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address output - new.sentence - organization output - publisher output - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } - -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - author format.key output % added - output.year.check % added - new.block - format.btitle - "title" output.check - organization address new.block.checkb -% Reversed the order of "address" and "organization", added the ":". - address output - organization "organization" output.check.colon -% address output -% ":" output -% organization output -% format.edition output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors - "author" output.check - author format.key output % added - output.year.check % added - new.block - format.title - "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - author format.key output % added - output.year.check % added - title howpublished new.block.checkb - format.title output - new.block - howpublished output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors - "author" output.check - author format.key output % added - output.year.check % added - new.block - format.btitle - "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - editor empty$ - { organization output } - { format.editors.dot output.nonnull } - if$ - author format.key output % added - output.year.check % added - new.block - format.btitle - "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address output - new.sentence - organization output - publisher output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors - "author" output.check - author format.key output % added - output.year.check % added - new.block - format.title - "title" output.check - new.block - format.tr.number output.nonnull - institution - "institution" output.check - address output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors - "author" output.check - author format.key output % added - output.year.check % added - new.block - format.title - "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - fin.entry -} - -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } - -MACRO {jan} {"January"} - -MACRO {feb} {"February"} - -MACRO {mar} {"March"} - -MACRO {apr} {"April"} - -MACRO {may} {"May"} - -MACRO {jun} {"June"} - -MACRO {jul} {"July"} - -MACRO {aug} {"August"} - -MACRO {sep} {"September"} - -MACRO {oct} {"October"} - -MACRO {nov} {"November"} - -MACRO {dec} {"December"} - -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} - -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} - -MACRO {ai} {"Artificial Intelligence"} - -MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} - -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} - -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} - -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} - -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} - -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} - -MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} - -MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} - -MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} - -MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} - -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} - -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} - -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} - -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} - -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} - -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} - -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} - -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} - -READ - -FUNCTION {sortify} -{ purify$ - "l" change.case$ -} - -INTEGERS { len } - -FUNCTION {chop.word} -{ 's := - 'len := - s #1 len substring$ = - { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } - 's - if$ -} - -INTEGERS { fullptr numfull fullsleft } - -STRINGS { u1 u2 } - -FUNCTION {my.full.label} -{ -% Initialize 'u1','u2','s'. - "" 'u1 := - "" 'u2 := - 's := - -% Initialize 'fullptr','numfull','fullsleft'. - #1 'fullptr := - s num.names$ 'numfull := - numfull 'fullsleft := - -% enter the while loop which generates the first-citation information. -% while we have names left, -% format the next name -% if this is the next-to-last name, tack the ampersand on the end -% else if this isn't the last name, tack the comma on the end. -% concatenate the next name onto the first-citation string. -% update the counters. - - { fullsleft #0 > } - { s fullptr "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ 'u1 := - fullsleft #2 = - { u1 " \& " * 'u1 := } - { fullsleft #2 > - { u1 ", " * 'u1 := } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - u2 u1 * 'u2 := - fullptr #1 + 'fullptr := - fullsleft #1 - 'fullsleft := - } - while$ - -% push 'u2' onto the stack -- our first-citation information. - u2 -} - -FUNCTION {format.lab.names} -{ 's := - s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ - s num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { "et~al. " * } -% { " and " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - { " \& " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {author.key.label} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - 'key - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {editor.key.label} -{ editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - 'key - if$ - } - { editor format.lab.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} -{ author empty$ - { editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - 'key - if$ - } - { editor format.lab.names } - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {calc.label} -{ type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.key.label - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.key.label - 'author.key.label - if$ - } - if$ - duplicate$ - - author my.full.label % generate the first-citation information. - - "\protect\citeauthoryear{" swap$ * "}{" * swap$ * "}{" * - year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ * - 'label := - year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ * - sortify 'sort.label := -} - -FUNCTION {sort.format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - "" - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { nameptr #1 > - { " " * } - 'skip$ - if$ - s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := - nameptr numnames = t "others" = and - { "et al" * } - { t sortify * } - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} - -FUNCTION {sort.format.title} -{ 't := - "A " #2 - "An " #3 - "The " #4 t chop.word - chop.word - chop.word - sortify - #1 global.max$ substring$ -} - -FUNCTION {author.sort} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {editor.sort} -{ editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { editor sort.format.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} -{ author empty$ - { editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { editor sort.format.names } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {presort} -{ calc.label - label sortify - " " - * - type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.sort - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.sort - 'author.sort - if$ - } - if$ - #1 entry.max$ substring$ % added for newapa - 'sort.label := % added for newapa - sort.label % added for newapa - * - " " - * - title field.or.null - sort.format.title - * - #1 entry.max$ substring$ - 'sort.key$ := -} - -ITERATE {presort} - -SORT % by label, sort.label, title --- for final label calculation - -STRINGS { last.label next.extra } - -INTEGERS { last.extra.num } - -FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} -{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := - "" 'next.extra := - #0 'last.extra.num := -} - -FUNCTION {forward.pass} -{ last.label label = - { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := - last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := - } - { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := - "" 'extra.label := - label 'last.label := - } - if$ -} - -FUNCTION {reverse.pass} -{ next.extra "b" = - { "a" 'extra.label := } - 'skip$ - if$ - label extra.label * "}" * 'label := - extra.label 'next.extra := -} - -EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} - -ITERATE {forward.pass} - -REVERSE {reverse.pass} - -FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} -{ sort.label - " " - * - year field.or.null sortify - * - " " - * - title field.or.null - sort.format.title - * - #1 entry.max$ substring$ - 'sort.key$ := -} - -ITERATE {bib.sort.order} - -SORT % by sort.label, year, title --- giving final bib. order. - -FUNCTION {begin.bib} - -{ preamble$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ -} - - -EXECUTE {begin.bib} - -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} - -ITERATE {call.type$} - -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} - -EXECUTE {end.bib} - - diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phaip.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phaip.bst deleted file mode 100644 index 4c138d904be..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phaip.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1885 +0,0 @@ -% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). -% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. - % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) - % of any bugs, improvements, etc. -% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written -% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put -% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles -% "C preprocessor" -% t) -% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with -% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx -% and run cpp with e.g., -% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> -% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. -% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) -% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles -% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last -% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. -% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles -% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles -% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers -% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) -% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles -% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles -% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets -% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles -% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries -% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. -% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals -% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation -% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note -% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) -% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. -% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" -% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels -% KEY_CITE: use key as label -% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations -% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps -% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name -% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. -% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections -% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. -% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. -% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to -% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. -% These are the original macros - % For American Institute of Physics Journals -% This is the start of btxbst.doc -% BibTeX `plain' family - % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. - % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. - % Copying of this file is authorized only if either - % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or - % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than - % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. - % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. - % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. -% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in -% these standard styles or in this documentation file. -% -% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, -% and is also a template file that you can use to make -% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. -% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like -% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt -% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt -% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt -% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt -% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. -% If you don't have access, -% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, -% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. -% -% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain -% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence -% #if VAR -% lines to be included when VAR is not zero -% #else -% lines to be included when VAR is zero -% #endif -% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of -% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. -% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. -% Variables can be set by -% #define VAR value -% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef -% to see if it has none. -% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines -% after the #if only if VAR is zero. -% -% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables -% so you can spot them easily -% -% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA -% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), -% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the -% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. -% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. -% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: -% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric -% label is used) -% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) -% and other info, like authors (if false, then -% entries remain in order of occurrence) -% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as -% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first -% names become initials) -% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be -% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or -% first letter after a colon -% (if false then they appear as in the database) -% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then -% they're abbreviated) -% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full -% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently -% as they appear in ACM publications) -%# define PLAIN 1 -% -% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen -% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized -% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence -% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). -% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry -% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) -% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break -% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, -% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; -% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. -% -% Citation alphabetic label format: -% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) -% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors -% -% Citation label numberic format: -% [number] -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: -% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever -% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, -% then title -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: -% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes -% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title -% -% Reference list ordering for unsorted: -% by the order cited in the text -% -% History -% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. -% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. -% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. -% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. -% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. -% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: -% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; -% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. -% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: -% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; -% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; -% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace -% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; -% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; -% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; -% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a -% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; -% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; -% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just -% the fields they're supposed to; -% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; -% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. -% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; -% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow -% either volume or number, not just volume; -% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; -% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field -% to tell where a conference was held; -% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume -% or number, and also a series field; -% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than -% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; -% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; -% MANUAL now prints out the organization in -% the first block if the author field is empty; -% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. -% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three -% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this -% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the -% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. -% -% The ENTRY declaration -% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), -% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. -% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't -% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields -% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. -ENTRY -% Fields: - { address -% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. -% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the -% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major -% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, -% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry -% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if -% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. -% annote -% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). - author -% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. - booktitle -% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. -% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. - chapter -% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. - edition -% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). - editor -% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. -% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be -% for the book or collection that the work appears in. - howpublished -% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). - institution -% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. - journal -% Journal name (macros are provided for many). - key -% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key -% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). - month -% Month (macros are provided). - note -% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). - number -% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. - organization -% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if -% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces -% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately -% condensed organization information in the key field as well. - pages -% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' -% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). - publisher -% Publisher name. - school -% School name (for theses). - series -% The name of a series or set of books. -% An individual book will will also have it's own title. - title -% The title of the thing you're referred to. - type -% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of -% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a -% thesis; or of a part of a book. - volume -% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. - year -% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end -% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). - } -% There are no integer entry variables - {} -% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. -% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. - { label } -% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the -% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields -% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions -% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), -% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. -% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the -% entry. -% -% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': -% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent -% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than -% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to -% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should -% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be -% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is -% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two -% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between -% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two -% successive new.block's. -% -% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. -% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be -% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come -% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending -% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. -% -% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. -% It will be one of these values: -% before.all just after the \bibitem -% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed -% if more sentence is output -% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed -% after.block just after a block (and sentence): -% period and \newblock needed. -% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence -% -% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output -% -% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) -% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed -% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of -% occurrence. -% -% output.nonnull(s) == -% BEGIN -% s := argument on stack -% if output.state = mid.sentence then -% write$(pop() * ", ") -% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top -% else -% if output.state = after.block then -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% write$("\newblock ") -% else -% if output.state = before.all then -% write$(pop()) -% else -- output.state should be after.sentence -% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") -% fi -% fi -% output.state := mid.sentence -% fi -% push s on stack -% END -% -% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; -% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) -% -% output(s) == -% BEGIN -% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if -% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty -% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; -% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when -% such fields are empty). -% -% output.check(s,t) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) -% else output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry -% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator -% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack -% as per the output convention. -% -% output.bibitem == -% BEGIN -% newline$ -% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, -% write$(label) % these three lines -% write$("]{") % are used -% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels -% write$(cite$) -% write$("}") -% push "" on stack -% output.state := before.all -% END -% -% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the -% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all -% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, -% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the -% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) -% -% fin.entry == -% BEGIN -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% END -% -% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and -% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. -% -% new.block == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.block -% fi -% END -% -% new.sentence == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> after.block then -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.sentence -% fi -% fi -% END -% -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} -% the variables s and t are temporary string holders -STRINGS { s t } -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { "," * write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - "\bibitem{" write$ - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} -% This function finishes all entries. -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ skip$ -} -% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack -% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. -% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because -% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The -% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; -% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. -FUNCTION {new.block.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. -% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by -% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), -% or they produce the null string. -% -% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the -% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no -% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) -% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. -% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. -% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the -% stack is a string rather than a missing field. -% -% field.or.null(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return s -% END -% -% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, -% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic -% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation -% will follow the result. -% -% emphasize(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return "{\em " * s * "}" -% -% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in -% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas -% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last -% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always -% contain at least one name. -% -% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER -% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% format.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% nameptr := 1 -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% namesleft := numnames -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% % for full names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% % for abbreviated first names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% if nameptr > 1 then -% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t -% else if numnames > 2 -% then nameresult := nameresult * "," -% fi -% if t = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." -% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t -% fi -% fi -% else nameresult := t -% fi -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% return nameresult -% END -% -% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) -% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string -% -% format.authors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then return "" -% else return format.names(author) -% fi -% END -% -% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, -% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" -% -% format.editors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(editor) then return "" -% else -% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then -% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" -% else -% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" -% fi -% fi -% END -% -% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be -% given for them. -% -% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and -% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {embolden} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {paren} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "(" swap$ * ")" * } - if$ -} -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } -INTEGERS { etal } -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames #5 > - s numnames "{ll}" format.name$ "others" = numnames #1 > and - or 'etal := - etal - { #1 #1 + 'namesleft := } - { numnames 'namesleft := } - if$ - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { nameptr #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - etal or - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { ", editors" * } - { ", editor" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.edited} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { "edited by " editor format.names * } - if$ -} -% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. -% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, -% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), -% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; -% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - { title "t" change.case$ } - if$ -} -% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX -% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. -% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to -% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. -% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) -% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' -% if it's not already -% -% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% n.dashify(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% pageresult := "" -% while (not empty$(t)) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-") -% then -% if (next character isn't) -% then -% pageresult := pageresult * "--" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% else -% while (first character of t = "-") -% do -% pageresult := pageresult * "-" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% od -% fi -% else -% pageresult := pageresult * the first character -% t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return pageresult -% END -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {first.page} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ -} -% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if -% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string -% if they're both empty. -FUNCTION {format.date} -{ year empty$ - { "" } - 'year - if$ -} -% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like -% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title emphasize -} -% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a -% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). -% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two -% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between -% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: -% -% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == -% BEGIN -% if text.length$(str2) < 3 -% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 -% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 -% END -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} -% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair -% are nonempty. -% -% either.or.check(t,s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) -% fi -% END -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} -% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps -% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field -% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume -% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), -% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} -% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name -% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to -% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the -% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either -% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. -% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field -% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title -% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". -% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} -% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. -% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because -% this doesn't start a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book -% (and in rare circumstances, an article). -% -% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" -% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. -% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" -% -% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) -% -% multi.page.check(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% multiresult := false -% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") -% then multiresult := true -% else t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return multiresult -% END -INTEGERS { multiresult } -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} -% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. -% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check - { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.pages.a} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { "page" pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range -% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some -% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null embolden - " " swap$ * * - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages.a } - { ", " * pages first.page * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the -% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. -% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence -% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one -% exists. -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "in " booktitle emphasize * } - { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and -% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. -FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} -{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ - month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ - and and and and and - { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, -% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack -% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} -% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" -% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; -% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. -% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "Technical Report" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because -% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving -% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature -% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled -% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for -% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; -% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; -% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Each of these is explained in more detail later. -% -% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is -% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- -% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be -% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). -% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry -% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. -% -% format.article.crossref == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(key) then -% if empty$(journal) then -% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * -% " to crossref " * crossref) -% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% else -% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * -% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% else -% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% END -% -% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ key empty$ - { journal empty$ - { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * - warning$ - "" - } - { "In " journal * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either -% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on -% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. -FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} -{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ - editor num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a -% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). -% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the -% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series -% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { series empty$ - { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" * - } - { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { key * } - if$ - } - { format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the -% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct -% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else -% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { booktitle empty$ - { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - } - { "In " format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear -% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These -% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for -% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the -% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. -% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, -% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. -% -% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may -% CROSSREF another article. -% Required fields: author, title, journal, year -% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note -% -% article == -% BEGIN -% output.bibitem -% output.check(format.authors,"author") -% new.block -% output.check(format.title,"title") -% new.block -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") -% output(format.vol.num.pages) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% else -% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) -% output(format.pages) -% fi -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. -% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year -% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, -% note -% -% book == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") -% else output.check(format.authors,"author") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) -% fi -% fi -% new.block -% output.check(format.btitle,"title") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output(format.bvolume) -% new.block -% output(format.number.series) -% new.sentence -% output.check(publisher,"publisher") -% output(address) -% else -% new.block -% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) -% fi -% output(format.edition) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal field.or.null - format.vol.num.pages - format.date empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.date paren } - { " " * format.date paren * } - if$ - } - if$ - output - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - howpublished address new.block.checkb - howpublished output - address output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. -% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. -% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field -% will come before number and series. -% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year -% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title -% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). -% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, -% address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may -% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) -% will appear just before note. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address empty$ - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - organization output - publisher output - } - if$ - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } -% A manual is technical documentation. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output.nonnull - address output - } - if$ - } - { format.authors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { address new.block.checka - address output - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - { organization address new.block.checkb - organization output - address output - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. -% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields -% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - title howpublished new.block.checkb - format.title output - howpublished new.block.checka - howpublished output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry - empty.misc.check -} -% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. -% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will -% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); -% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. -% Required: title, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - editor empty$ - { organization output } - { format.editors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address empty$ - { editor empty$ - { publisher new.sentence.checka } - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - } - if$ - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - editor empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output } - if$ - publisher output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A techreport is a technical report. -% Required: author, title, institution, year -% Optional: type, number, address, month, note -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - format.tr.number output.nonnull - institution "institution" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. -% Required: author, title, note -% Optional: month, year -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - format.date output - fin.entry -} -% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } -% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. -% Users are encouraged to use these macros. -% -% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated -MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} -MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} -MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} -MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} -MACRO {may} {"May"} -MACRO {jun} {"June"} -MACRO {jul} {"July"} -MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} -MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} -MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} -MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} -MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} -% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; -% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. -% -% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make -% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then -% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} -MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} -MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} -MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} -MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} -MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} -%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 -%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> -%% Change file names in leading comment -% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation -% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. -% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 -% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the -% corresponding changes to -% phyjabb.bib -% phyjabb.btx -MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} -MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} -MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} -MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} -MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} -MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} -MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} -MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} -MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} -MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} -MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} -MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} -MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} -MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} -MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} -MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} -MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} -MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} -MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} -MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} -MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} -MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} -MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} -MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} -MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} -MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} -MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} -MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} -MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} -MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} -MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} -MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} -MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} -MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} -MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} -MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} -MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} -MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} -MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} -MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} -MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} -MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} -MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} -MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} -MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} -MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} -% Now we read in the .BIB entries. -READ -% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's -% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting -% -% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len -% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the -% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels -% -% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of -% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, -% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; -% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). -% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just -% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), -% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean -% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we -% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. -% -% format.lab.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% if numnames > 1 then -% if numnames > 4 then -% namesleft := 3 -% else -% namesleft := numnames -% nameptr := 1 -% nameresult := "" -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% if (name_ptr = numnames) and -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else nameresult := nameresult * -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% if numnames > 4 then -% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else -% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token -% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) -% else -% nameresult := t -% fi -% fi -% return nameresult -% END -% -% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label -% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always -% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, -% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part -% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any -% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. -% -% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of -% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and -% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might -% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field -% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). -% -% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which -% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or -% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, -% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last -% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields -% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use -% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. -% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed -% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). -% -% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. -% -% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from -% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s -% until after sorting. -% -% calc.label == -% BEGIN -% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then -% author.editor.key.label -% else if type$ = "proceedings" then -% editor.key.organization.label -% else if type$ = "manual" then -% author.key.organization.label -% else -% author.key.label -% fi fi fi -% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) -% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label -% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits -% END -% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. -% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated -% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" -% come before "brinch hansen per". -% -% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by -% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization -% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on -% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title -% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). -% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. -% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank -% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves -% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, -% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), -% and four will separate year from title. -% -% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in -% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated -% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same -% as format.names. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted -% -% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's -% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward -% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass -% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there -% are 'b's). -% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -% -% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string -% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer -% -% initialize.longest.label == -% BEGIN -% longest.label := "" -% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) -% next.extra := "" -% longest.label.width := 0 -% last.extra.num := 0 -% END -% -% forward.pass == -% BEGIN -% if last.sort.label = sort.label then -% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 -% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) -% else -% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") -% extra.label := "" -% last.sort.label := sort.label -% fi -% END -% -% reverse.pass == -% BEGIN -% if next.extra = "b" then -% extra.label := "a" -% fi -% label := label * extra.label -% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then -% longest.label := label -% longest.label.width := width$(label) -% fi -% next.extra := extra.label -% END -% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. -% We use either the sorted order or original order. -% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -STRINGS { longest.label } -INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } -FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} -{ "" 'longest.label := - #1 'number.label := - #0 'longest.label.width := -} -FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} -{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := - number.label #1 + 'number.label := - label width$ longest.label.width > - { label 'longest.label := - label width$ 'longest.label.width := - } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} -ITERATE {longest.label.pass} -% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. -% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic -% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. -% Then we give an incantation containing the command -% \begin{thebibliography}{...} -% where the `...' is the longest label. -% -% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. -FUNCTION {begin.bib} -{ preamble$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {begin.bib} -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} -% Now we produce the output for all the entries -ITERATE {call.type$} -% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phapalik.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phapalik.bst deleted file mode 100644 index 84a0dda965e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phapalik.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1943 +0,0 @@ -% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). -% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. - % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) - % of any bugs, improvements, etc. -% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written -% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put -% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles -% "C preprocessor" -% t) -% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with -% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx -% and run cpp with e.g., -% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> -% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. -% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) -% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles -% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last -% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. -% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles -% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles -% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers -% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) -% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles -% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles -% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets -% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles -% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries -% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. -% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals -% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation -% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note -% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) -% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. -% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" -% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels -% KEY_CITE: use key as label -% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations -% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps -% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name -% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. -% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections -% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. -% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. -% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to -% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. -% These are the original macros - % For American Psychological Association - % (same as ALPHA but with 0 set and 0 unset) -% This is the start of btxbst.doc -% BibTeX `plain' family - % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. - % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. - % Copying of this file is authorized only if either - % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or - % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than - % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. - % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. - % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. -% BibTeX `apalike' bibliography style (24-Jan-88 version) -% Adapted from the `alpha' style, version 0.99a; for BibTeX version 0.99a. -% Copyright (C) 1988, all rights reserved. -% Copying of this file is allowed, provided that if you make any changes at all -% you name it something other than `apalike.bst'. -% This restriction helps ensure that all copies are identical. -% Differences between this style and `alpha' are generally heralded by a `%'. -% The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for alpha.bst. -% -% This style should be used with the `apalike' LaTeX style (apalike.sty). -% \cite's come out like "(Jones, 1986)" in the text but there are no labels -% in the bibliography, and something like "(1986)" comes out immediately -% after the author. Author (and editor) names appear as last name, comma, -% initials. A `year' field is required for every entry, and so is either -% an author (or in some cases, an editor) field or a key field. -% -% Editorial note: -% Many journals require a style like `apalike', but I strongly, strongly, -% strongly recommend that you not use it if you have a choice---use something -% like `plain' instead. Mary-Claire van Leunen (A Handbook for Scholars, -% Knopf, 1979) argues convincingly that a style like `plain' encourages better -% writing than one like `apalike'. Furthermore the strongest arguments for -% using an author-date style like `apalike'---that it's "the most practical" -% (The Chicago Manual of Style, University of Chicago Press, thirteenth -% edition, 1982, pages 400--401)---fall flat on their face with the new -% computer-typesetting technology. For instance page 401 anachronistically -% states "The chief disadvantage of [a style like `plain'] is that additions -% or deletions cannot be made after the manuscript is typed without changing -% numbers in both text references and list." LaTeX sidesteps the disadvantage. -% -% History: -% 15-sep-86 (SK,OP) Original version, by Susan King and Oren Patashnik. -% 10-nov-86 (OP) Truncated the sort.key$ string to the correct length -% in bib.sort.order to eliminate error message. -% 24-jan-88 (OP) Updated for BibTeX version 0.99a, from alpha.bst 0.99a; -% apalike now sorts by author, then year, then title; -% THIS `apalike' VERSION DOES NOT WORK WITH BIBTEX 0.98i. -% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in -% these standard styles or in this documentation file. -% -% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, -% and is also a template file that you can use to make -% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. -% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like -% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt -% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt -% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt -% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt -% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. -% If you don't have access, -% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, -% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. -% -% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain -% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence -% #if VAR -% lines to be included when VAR is not zero -% #else -% lines to be included when VAR is zero -% #endif -% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of -% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. -% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. -% Variables can be set by -% #define VAR value -% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef -% to see if it has none. -% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines -% after the #if only if VAR is zero. -% -% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables -% so you can spot them easily -% -% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA -% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), -% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the -% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. -% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. -% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: -% 1: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric -% label is used) -% 1: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) -% and other info, like authors (if false, then -% entries remain in order of occurrence) -% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as -% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first -% names become initials) -% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be -% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or -% first letter after a colon -% (if false then they appear as in the database) -% 1: months are spelled out in full (if false, then -% they're abbreviated) -% 1: macro journal names are spelled out in full -% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently -% as they appear in ACM publications) -%# define PLAIN 1 -% -% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen -% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized -% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence -% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). -% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry -% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) -% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break -% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, -% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; -% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. -% -% Citation alphabetic label format: -% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) -% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors -% -% Citation label numberic format: -% [number] -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: -% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever -% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, -% then title -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: -% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes -% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title -% -% Reference list ordering for unsorted: -% by the order cited in the text -% -% History -% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. -% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. -% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. -% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. -% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. -% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: -% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; -% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. -% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: -% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; -% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; -% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace -% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; -% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; -% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; -% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a -% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; -% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; -% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just -% the fields they're supposed to; -% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; -% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. -% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; -% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow -% either volume or number, not just volume; -% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; -% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field -% to tell where a conference was held; -% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume -% or number, and also a series field; -% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than -% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; -% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; -% MANUAL now prints out the organization in -% the first block if the author field is empty; -% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. -% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three -% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this -% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the -% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. -% -% The ENTRY declaration -% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), -% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. -% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't -% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields -% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. -ENTRY -% Fields: - { address -% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. -% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the -% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major -% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, -% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry -% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if -% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. -% annote -% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). - author -% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. - booktitle -% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. -% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. - chapter -% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. - edition -% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). - editor -% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. -% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be -% for the book or collection that the work appears in. - howpublished -% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). - institution -% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. - journal -% Journal name (macros are provided for many). - key -% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key -% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). -% month not used in apalike -% Month (macros are provided). - note -% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). - number -% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. - organization -% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if -% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces -% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately -% condensed organization information in the key field as well. - pages -% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' -% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). - publisher -% Publisher name. - school -% School name (for theses). - series -% The name of a series or set of books. -% An individual book will will also have it's own title. - title -% The title of the thing you're referred to. - type -% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of -% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a -% thesis; or of a part of a book. - volume -% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. - year -% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end -% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). - } -% There are no integer entry variables - {} -% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. -% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. - { label extra.label sort.label } -% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the -% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields -% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions -% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), -% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. -% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the -% entry. -% -% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': -% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent -% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than -% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to -% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should -% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be -% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is -% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two -% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between -% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two -% successive new.block's. -% -% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. -% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be -% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come -% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending -% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. -% -% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. -% It will be one of these values: -% before.all just after the \bibitem -% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed -% if more sentence is output -% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed -% after.block just after a block (and sentence): -% period and \newblock needed. -% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence -% -% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output -% -% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) -% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed -% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of -% occurrence. -% -% output.nonnull(s) == -% BEGIN -% s := argument on stack -% if output.state = mid.sentence then -% write$(pop() * ", ") -% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top -% else -% if output.state = after.block then -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% write$("\newblock ") -% else -% if output.state = before.all then -% write$(pop()) -% else -- output.state should be after.sentence -% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") -% fi -% fi -% output.state := mid.sentence -% fi -% push s on stack -% END -% -% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; -% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) -% -% output(s) == -% BEGIN -% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if -% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty -% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; -% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when -% such fields are empty). -% -% output.check(s,t) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) -% else output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry -% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator -% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack -% as per the output convention. -% -% output.bibitem == -% BEGIN -% newline$ -% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, -% write$(label) % these three lines -% write$("]{") % are used -% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels -% write$(cite$) -% write$("}") -% push "" on stack -% output.state := before.all -% END -% -% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the -% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all -% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, -% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the -% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) -% -% fin.entry == -% BEGIN -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% END -% -% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and -% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. -% -% new.block == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.block -% fi -% END -% -% new.sentence == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> after.block then -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.sentence -% fi -% fi -% END -% -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} -% the variables s and t are temporary string holders -STRINGS { s t } -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { add.period$ write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -% apalike needs this function because -% the year has special punctuation; -% apalike ignores the month -FUNCTION {output.year.check} -{ year empty$ - { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ } - { write$ - " (" year * extra.label * ")" * - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - "\bibitem[" write$ - label write$ - "]{" write$ - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} -% This function finishes all entries. -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ output.state after.block = - 'skip$ - { output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.sentence 'output.state := } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack -% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. -% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because -% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The -% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; -% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. -% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by -% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), -% or they produce the null string. -% -% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the -% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no -% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) -% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. -% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. -% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the -% stack is a string rather than a missing field. -% -% field.or.null(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return s -% END -% -% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, -% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic -% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation -% will follow the result. -% -% emphasize(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return "{\em " * s * "}" -% -% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in -% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas -% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last -% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always -% contain at least one name. -% -% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER -% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% format.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% nameptr := 1 -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% namesleft := numnames -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% % for full names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% % for abbreviated first names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% if nameptr > 1 then -% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t -% else if numnames > 2 -% then nameresult := nameresult * "," -% fi -% if t = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." -% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t -% fi -% fi -% else nameresult := t -% fi -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% return nameresult -% END -% -% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) -% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string -% -% format.authors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then return "" -% else return format.names(author) -% fi -% END -% -% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, -% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" -% -% format.editors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(editor) then return "" -% else -% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then -% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" -% else -% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" -% fi -% fi -% END -% -% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be -% given for them. -% -% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and -% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { numnames #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.key} % this function is just for apalike -{ empty$ - { key field.or.null } - { "" } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { ", editors" * } - { ", editor" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. -% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, -% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), -% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; -% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - { title "t" change.case$ } - if$ -} -% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX -% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. -% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to -% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. -% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) -% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' -% if it's not already -% -% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% n.dashify(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% pageresult := "" -% while (not empty$(t)) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-") -% then -% if (next character isn't) -% then -% pageresult := pageresult * "--" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% else -% while (first character of t = "-") -% do -% pageresult := pageresult * "-" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% od -% fi -% else -% pageresult := pageresult * the first character -% t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return pageresult -% END -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} -% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like -% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title emphasize -} -% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a -% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). -% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two -% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between -% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: -% -% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == -% BEGIN -% if text.length$(str2) < 3 -% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 -% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 -% END -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} -% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair -% are nonempty. -% -% either.or.check(t,s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) -% fi -% END -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} -% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps -% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field -% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume -% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), -% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} -% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name -% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to -% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the -% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either -% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. -% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field -% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title -% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". -% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} -% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. -% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because -% this doesn't start a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book -% (and in rare circumstances, an article). -% -% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" -% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. -% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" -% -% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) -% -% multi.page.check(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% multiresult := false -% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") -% then multiresult := true -% else t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return multiresult -% END -INTEGERS { multiresult } -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} -% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. -% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check - { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range -% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some -% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null - number empty$ - 'skip$ - { "(" number * ")" * * - volume empty$ - { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages } - { ":" * pages n.dashify * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the -% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. -% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence -% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one -% exists. -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "In " booktitle emphasize * } - { "In " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, -% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack -% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} -% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" -% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; -% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. -% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "Technical Report" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because -% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving -% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature -% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled -% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for -% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; -% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; -% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Each of these is explained in more detail later. -% -% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is -% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- -% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be -% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). -% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry -% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. -% -% format.article.crossref == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(key) then -% if empty$(journal) then -% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * -% " to crossref " * crossref) -% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% else -% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * -% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% else -% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% END -% -% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ "In" % this is for apalike - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a -% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). -% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the -% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series -% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * % this is for apalike -} -% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the -% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct -% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else -% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ "In" % this is for apalike - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear -% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These -% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for -% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the -% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. -% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, -% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. -% -% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may -% CROSSREF another article. -% Required fields: author, title, journal, year -% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note -% -% article == -% BEGIN -% output.bibitem -% output.check(format.authors,"author") -% new.block -% output.check(format.title,"title") -% new.block -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") -% output(format.vol.num.pages) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% else -% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) -% output(format.pages) -% fi -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. -% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year -% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, -% note -% -% book == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") -% else output.check(format.authors,"author") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) -% fi -% fi -% new.block -% output.check(format.btitle,"title") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output(format.bvolume) -% new.block -% output(format.number.series) -% new.sentence -% output.check(publisher,"publisher") -% output(address) -% else -% new.block -% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) -% fi -% output(format.edition) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal emphasize "journal" output.check - format.vol.num.pages output - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check - editor format.key output - } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - output.year.check % special for apalike - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - howpublished output - address output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. -% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. -% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field -% will come before number and series. -% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year -% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check - editor format.key output - } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - output.year.check % special for apalike - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title -% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). -% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, -% address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - format.edition output - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may -% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) -% will appear just before note. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address output % for apalike - new.sentence % there's no year - organization output % here so things - publisher output % are simpler - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } -% A manual is technical documentation. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - organization address new.block.checkb - organization output - address output - format.edition output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. -% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields -% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title output - new.block - howpublished output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. -% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will -% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); -% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. -% Required: title, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.editors output - editor format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address output % for apalike - new.sentence % we always output - organization output % a nonempty organization - publisher output % here - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A techreport is a technical report. -% Required: author, title, institution, year -% Optional: type, number, address, month, note -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - format.tr.number output.nonnull - institution "institution" output.check - address output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. -% Required: author, title, note -% Optional: month, year -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - fin.entry -} -% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } -% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. -% Users are encouraged to use these macros. -% -% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated -MACRO {jan} {"January"} -MACRO {feb} {"February"} -MACRO {mar} {"March"} -MACRO {apr} {"April"} -MACRO {may} {"May"} -MACRO {jun} {"June"} -MACRO {jul} {"July"} -MACRO {aug} {"August"} -MACRO {sep} {"September"} -MACRO {oct} {"October"} -MACRO {nov} {"November"} -MACRO {dec} {"December"} -% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; -% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. -% -% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make -% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then -% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Computing Surveys"} -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Informatica"} -MACRO {cacm} {"Communications of the ACM"} -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM Journal of Research and Development"} -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Systems Journal"} -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Transactions on Software Engineering"} -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Transactions on Computers"} -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Transactions on Computer-Aided Design of Integrated Circuits"} -MACRO {ipl} {"Information Processing Letters"} -MACRO {jacm} {"Journal of the ACM"} -MACRO {jcss} {"Journal of Computer and System Sciences"} -MACRO {scp} {"Science of Computer Programming"} -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM Journal on Computing"} -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Transactions on Computer Systems"} -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Transactions on Database Systems"} -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Transactions on Graphics"} -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Transactions on Mathematical Software"} -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Transactions on Office Information Systems"} -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Transactions on Programming Languages and Systems"} -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Computer Science"} -% Now we read in the .BIB entries. -READ -% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's -% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting -% -% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len -% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the -% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. -FUNCTION {sortify} -{ purify$ - "l" change.case$ -} -INTEGERS { len } -FUNCTION {chop.word} -{ 's := - 'len := - s #1 len substring$ = - { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } - 's - if$ -} -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels -% -% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of -% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, -% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; -% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). -% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just -% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), -% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean -% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we -% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. -% -% format.lab.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% if numnames > 1 then -% if numnames > 4 then -% namesleft := 3 -% else -% namesleft := numnames -% nameptr := 1 -% nameresult := "" -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% if (name_ptr = numnames) and -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else nameresult := nameresult * -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% if numnames > 4 then -% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else -% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token -% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) -% else -% nameresult := t -% fi -% fi -% return nameresult -% END -% -% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label -% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always -% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, -% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part -% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any -% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. -% -% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of -% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and -% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might -% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field -% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). -% -% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which -% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or -% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, -% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last -% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields -% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use -% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. -% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed -% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). -% -% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. -% -% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from -% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s -% until after sorting. -% -% calc.label == -% BEGIN -% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then -% author.editor.key.label -% else if type$ = "proceedings" then -% editor.key.organization.label -% else if type$ = "manual" then -% author.key.organization.label -% else -% author.key.label -% fi fi fi -% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) -% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label -% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits -% END -% There are three apalike cases: one person (Jones), -% two (Jones and de~Bruijn), and more (Jones et~al.). -% This function is much like format.crossref.editors. -% -FUNCTION {format.lab.names} -{ 's := - s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ - s num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {author.key.label} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - 'key % apalike uses the whole key - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} -{ author empty$ - { editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - 'key % apalike uses the whole key - if$ - } - { editor format.lab.names } - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {editor.key.label} -{ editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - 'key % apalike uses the whole key, no organization - if$ - } - { editor format.lab.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {calc.label} -{ type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.key.label - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.key.label % apalike ignores organization - 'author.key.label % for labeling and sorting - if$ - } - if$ - ", " % these three lines are - * % for apalike, which - year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ % uses all four digits - * - 'label := -} -% It doesn't seem like a particularly good idea to use an order-of-citation -% reference list when using alphabetic labels, but we need to have a -% special pass to calculate labels when this happens. -% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. -% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated -% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" -% come before "brinch hansen per". -% -% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by -% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization -% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on -% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title -% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). -% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. -% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank -% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves -% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, -% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), -% and four will separate year from title. -% -% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in -% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated -% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same -% as format.names. -FUNCTION {sort.format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - "" - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { nameptr #1 > - { " " * } - 'skip$ - if$ % apalike uses initials - s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := % <= here - nameptr numnames = t "others" = and - { "et al" * } - { t sortify * } - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -% The sort.format.title function returns the argument, -% but first any leading "A "'s, "An "'s, or "The "'s are removed. -% The chop.word function uses s, so we need another string variable, t -FUNCTION {sort.format.title} -{ 't := - "A " #2 - "An " #3 - "The " #4 t chop.word - chop.word - chop.word - sortify - #1 global.max$ substring$ -} -% The auxiliary functions here, for the presort function, are analogous to -% the ones for calc.label; the same comments apply, except that the -% organization field takes precedence here over the key field. For sorting -% purposes, we still remove a leading "The " from the organization field. -FUNCTION {author.sort} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} -{ author empty$ - { editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { editor sort.format.names } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {editor.sort} -{ editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { editor sort.format.names } - if$ -} -% apalike uses two sorting passes; the first one sets the -% labels so that the `a's, `b's, etc. can be computed; -% the second pass puts the references in "correct" order. -% The presort function is for the first pass. It computes -% label, sort.label, and title, and then concatenates. -FUNCTION {presort} -{ calc.label - label sortify - " " - * - type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.sort - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.sort - 'author.sort - if$ - } - if$ - #1 entry.max$ substring$ % for - 'sort.label := % apalike - sort.label % style - * - " " - * - title field.or.null - sort.format.title - * - #1 entry.max$ substring$ - 'sort.key$ := -} -ITERATE {presort} -% And now we can sort -SORT % by label, sort.label, title---for final label calculation -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted -% -% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's -% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward -% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass -% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there -% are 'b's). -% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -% -% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string -% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer -% -% initialize.longest.label == -% BEGIN -% longest.label := "" -% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) -% next.extra := "" -% longest.label.width := 0 -% last.extra.num := 0 -% END -% -% forward.pass == -% BEGIN -% if last.sort.label = sort.label then -% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 -% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) -% else -% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") -% extra.label := "" -% last.sort.label := sort.label -% fi -% END -% -% reverse.pass == -% BEGIN -% if next.extra = "b" then -% extra.label := "a" -% fi -% label := label * extra.label -% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then -% longest.label := label -% longest.label.width := width$(label) -% fi -% next.extra := extra.label -% END -STRINGS { last.label next.extra } % apalike labels are only for the text; -INTEGERS { last.extra.num } % there are none in the bibliography -FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} % and hence there is no `longest.label' -{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := - "" 'next.extra := - #0 'last.extra.num := -} -FUNCTION {forward.pass} -{ last.label label = - { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := - last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := - } - { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := - "" 'extra.label := - label 'last.label := - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {reverse.pass} -{ next.extra "b" = - { "a" 'extra.label := } - 'skip$ - if$ - label extra.label * 'label := - extra.label 'next.extra := -} -EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} -ITERATE {forward.pass} -REVERSE {reverse.pass} -% Now that the label is right we sort for real, -% on sort.label then year then title. This is -% for the second sorting pass. -FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} -{ sort.label - " " - * - year field.or.null sortify - * - " " - * - title field.or.null - sort.format.title - * - #1 entry.max$ substring$ - 'sort.key$ := -} -ITERATE {bib.sort.order} -SORT % by sort.label, year, title---giving final bibliography order -% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. -% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic -% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. -% Then we give an incantation containing the command -% \begin{thebibliography}{...} -% where the `...' is the longest label. -% -% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. -FUNCTION {begin.bib} -{ preamble$ empty$ % no \etalchar in apalike - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ % no labels in apalike -} -EXECUTE {begin.bib} -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} -% Now we produce the output for all the entries -ITERATE {call.type$} -% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phcpc.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phcpc.bst deleted file mode 100644 index e313fe16af8..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phcpc.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1885 +0,0 @@ -% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). -% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. - % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) - % of any bugs, improvements, etc. -% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written -% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put -% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles -% "C preprocessor" -% t) -% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with -% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx -% and run cpp with e.g., -% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> -% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. -% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) -% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles -% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last -% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. -% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles -% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles -% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers -% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) -% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles -% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles -% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets -% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles -% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries -% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. -% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals -% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation -% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note -% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) -% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. -% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" -% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels -% KEY_CITE: use key as label -% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations -% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps -% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name -% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. -% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections -% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. -% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. -% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to -% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. -% These are the original macros - % For Computer Physics Communications -% same as AIP except for 0, 0 -% This is the start of btxbst.doc -% BibTeX `plain' family - % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. - % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. - % Copying of this file is authorized only if either - % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or - % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than - % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. - % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. - % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. -% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in -% these standard styles or in this documentation file. -% -% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, -% and is also a template file that you can use to make -% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. -% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like -% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt -% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt -% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt -% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt -% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. -% If you don't have access, -% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, -% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. -% -% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain -% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence -% #if VAR -% lines to be included when VAR is not zero -% #else -% lines to be included when VAR is zero -% #endif -% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of -% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. -% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. -% Variables can be set by -% #define VAR value -% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef -% to see if it has none. -% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines -% after the #if only if VAR is zero. -% -% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables -% so you can spot them easily -% -% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA -% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), -% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the -% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. -% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. -% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: -% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric -% label is used) -% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) -% and other info, like authors (if false, then -% entries remain in order of occurrence) -% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as -% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first -% names become initials) -% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be -% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or -% first letter after a colon -% (if false then they appear as in the database) -% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then -% they're abbreviated) -% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full -% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently -% as they appear in ACM publications) -%# define PLAIN 1 -% -% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen -% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized -% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence -% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). -% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry -% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) -% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break -% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, -% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; -% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. -% -% Citation alphabetic label format: -% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) -% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors -% -% Citation label numberic format: -% [number] -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: -% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever -% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, -% then title -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: -% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes -% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title -% -% Reference list ordering for unsorted: -% by the order cited in the text -% -% History -% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. -% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. -% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. -% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. -% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. -% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: -% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; -% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. -% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: -% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; -% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; -% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace -% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; -% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; -% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; -% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a -% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; -% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; -% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just -% the fields they're supposed to; -% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; -% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. -% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; -% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow -% either volume or number, not just volume; -% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; -% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field -% to tell where a conference was held; -% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume -% or number, and also a series field; -% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than -% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; -% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; -% MANUAL now prints out the organization in -% the first block if the author field is empty; -% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. -% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three -% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this -% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the -% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. -% -% The ENTRY declaration -% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), -% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. -% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't -% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields -% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. -ENTRY -% Fields: - { address -% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. -% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the -% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major -% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, -% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry -% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if -% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. -% annote -% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). - author -% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. - booktitle -% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. -% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. - chapter -% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. - edition -% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). - editor -% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. -% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be -% for the book or collection that the work appears in. - howpublished -% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). - institution -% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. - journal -% Journal name (macros are provided for many). - key -% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key -% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). - month -% Month (macros are provided). - note -% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). - number -% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. - organization -% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if -% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces -% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately -% condensed organization information in the key field as well. - pages -% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' -% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). - publisher -% Publisher name. - school -% School name (for theses). - series -% The name of a series or set of books. -% An individual book will will also have it's own title. - title -% The title of the thing you're referred to. - type -% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of -% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a -% thesis; or of a part of a book. - volume -% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. - year -% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end -% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). - } -% There are no integer entry variables - {} -% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. -% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. - { label } -% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the -% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields -% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions -% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), -% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. -% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the -% entry. -% -% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': -% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent -% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than -% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to -% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should -% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be -% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is -% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two -% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between -% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two -% successive new.block's. -% -% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. -% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be -% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come -% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending -% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. -% -% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. -% It will be one of these values: -% before.all just after the \bibitem -% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed -% if more sentence is output -% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed -% after.block just after a block (and sentence): -% period and \newblock needed. -% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence -% -% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output -% -% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) -% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed -% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of -% occurrence. -% -% output.nonnull(s) == -% BEGIN -% s := argument on stack -% if output.state = mid.sentence then -% write$(pop() * ", ") -% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top -% else -% if output.state = after.block then -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% write$("\newblock ") -% else -% if output.state = before.all then -% write$(pop()) -% else -- output.state should be after.sentence -% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") -% fi -% fi -% output.state := mid.sentence -% fi -% push s on stack -% END -% -% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; -% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) -% -% output(s) == -% BEGIN -% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if -% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty -% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; -% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when -% such fields are empty). -% -% output.check(s,t) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) -% else output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry -% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator -% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack -% as per the output convention. -% -% output.bibitem == -% BEGIN -% newline$ -% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, -% write$(label) % these three lines -% write$("]{") % are used -% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels -% write$(cite$) -% write$("}") -% push "" on stack -% output.state := before.all -% END -% -% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the -% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all -% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, -% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the -% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) -% -% fin.entry == -% BEGIN -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% END -% -% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and -% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. -% -% new.block == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.block -% fi -% END -% -% new.sentence == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> after.block then -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.sentence -% fi -% fi -% END -% -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} -% the variables s and t are temporary string holders -STRINGS { s t } -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { "," * write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - "\bibitem{" write$ - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} -% This function finishes all entries. -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ skip$ -} -% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack -% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. -% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because -% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The -% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; -% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. -FUNCTION {new.block.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. -% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by -% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), -% or they produce the null string. -% -% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the -% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no -% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) -% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. -% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. -% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the -% stack is a string rather than a missing field. -% -% field.or.null(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return s -% END -% -% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, -% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic -% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation -% will follow the result. -% -% emphasize(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return "{\em " * s * "}" -% -% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in -% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas -% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last -% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always -% contain at least one name. -% -% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER -% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% format.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% nameptr := 1 -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% namesleft := numnames -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% % for full names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% % for abbreviated first names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% if nameptr > 1 then -% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t -% else if numnames > 2 -% then nameresult := nameresult * "," -% fi -% if t = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." -% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t -% fi -% fi -% else nameresult := t -% fi -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% return nameresult -% END -% -% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) -% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string -% -% format.authors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then return "" -% else return format.names(author) -% fi -% END -% -% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, -% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" -% -% format.editors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(editor) then return "" -% else -% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then -% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" -% else -% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" -% fi -% fi -% END -% -% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be -% given for them. -% -% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and -% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {embolden} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {paren} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "(" swap$ * ")" * } - if$ -} -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } -INTEGERS { etal } -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames #5 > - s numnames "{ll}" format.name$ "others" = numnames #1 > and - or 'etal := - etal - { #1 #1 + 'namesleft := } - { numnames 'namesleft := } - if$ - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { nameptr #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - etal or - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { ", editors" * } - { ", editor" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.edited} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { "edited by " editor format.names * } - if$ -} -% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. -% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, -% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), -% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; -% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - { title "t" change.case$ } - if$ -} -% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX -% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. -% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to -% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. -% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) -% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' -% if it's not already -% -% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% n.dashify(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% pageresult := "" -% while (not empty$(t)) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-") -% then -% if (next character isn't) -% then -% pageresult := pageresult * "--" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% else -% while (first character of t = "-") -% do -% pageresult := pageresult * "-" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% od -% fi -% else -% pageresult := pageresult * the first character -% t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return pageresult -% END -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {first.page} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ -} -% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if -% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string -% if they're both empty. -FUNCTION {format.date} -{ year empty$ - { "" } - 'year - if$ -} -% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like -% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title emphasize -} -% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a -% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). -% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two -% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between -% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: -% -% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == -% BEGIN -% if text.length$(str2) < 3 -% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 -% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 -% END -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} -% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair -% are nonempty. -% -% either.or.check(t,s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) -% fi -% END -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} -% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps -% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field -% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume -% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), -% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} -% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name -% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to -% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the -% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either -% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. -% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field -% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title -% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". -% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} -% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. -% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because -% this doesn't start a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book -% (and in rare circumstances, an article). -% -% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" -% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. -% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" -% -% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) -% -% multi.page.check(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% multiresult := false -% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") -% then multiresult := true -% else t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return multiresult -% END -INTEGERS { multiresult } -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} -% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. -% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check - { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.pages.a} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { "page" pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range -% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some -% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null embolden - " " swap$ * * - format.date empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.date paren } - { " " * format.date paren * } - if$ - } - if$ - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages.a } - { " " * pages first.page *} - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the -% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. -% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence -% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one -% exists. -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "in " booktitle emphasize * } - { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and -% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. -FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} -{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ - month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ - and and and and and - { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, -% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack -% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} -% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" -% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; -% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. -% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "Technical Report" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because -% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving -% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature -% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled -% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for -% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; -% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; -% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Each of these is explained in more detail later. -% -% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is -% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- -% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be -% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). -% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry -% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. -% -% format.article.crossref == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(key) then -% if empty$(journal) then -% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * -% " to crossref " * crossref) -% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% else -% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * -% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% else -% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% END -% -% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ key empty$ - { journal empty$ - { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * - warning$ - "" - } - { "In " journal * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either -% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on -% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. -FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} -{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ - editor num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a -% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). -% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the -% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series -% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { series empty$ - { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" * - } - { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { key * } - if$ - } - { format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the -% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct -% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else -% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { booktitle empty$ - { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - } - { "In " format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear -% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These -% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for -% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the -% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. -% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, -% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. -% -% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may -% CROSSREF another article. -% Required fields: author, title, journal, year -% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note -% -% article == -% BEGIN -% output.bibitem -% output.check(format.authors,"author") -% new.block -% output.check(format.title,"title") -% new.block -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") -% output(format.vol.num.pages) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% else -% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) -% output(format.pages) -% fi -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. -% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year -% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, -% note -% -% book == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") -% else output.check(format.authors,"author") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) -% fi -% fi -% new.block -% output.check(format.btitle,"title") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output(format.bvolume) -% new.block -% output(format.number.series) -% new.sentence -% output.check(publisher,"publisher") -% output(address) -% else -% new.block -% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) -% fi -% output(format.edition) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal field.or.null - format.vol.num.pages output - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - howpublished address new.block.checkb - howpublished output - address output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. -% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. -% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field -% will come before number and series. -% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year -% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title -% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). -% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, -% address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may -% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) -% will appear just before note. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address empty$ - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - organization output - publisher output - } - if$ - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } -% A manual is technical documentation. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output.nonnull - address output - } - if$ - } - { format.authors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { address new.block.checka - address output - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - { organization address new.block.checkb - organization output - address output - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. -% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields -% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - title howpublished new.block.checkb - format.title output - howpublished new.block.checka - howpublished output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry - empty.misc.check -} -% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. -% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will -% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); -% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. -% Required: title, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - editor empty$ - { organization output } - { format.editors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address empty$ - { editor empty$ - { publisher new.sentence.checka } - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - } - if$ - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - editor empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output } - if$ - publisher output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A techreport is a technical report. -% Required: author, title, institution, year -% Optional: type, number, address, month, note -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - format.tr.number output.nonnull - institution "institution" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. -% Required: author, title, note -% Optional: month, year -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - format.date output - fin.entry -} -% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } -% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. -% Users are encouraged to use these macros. -% -% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated -MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} -MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} -MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} -MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} -MACRO {may} {"May"} -MACRO {jun} {"June"} -MACRO {jul} {"July"} -MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} -MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} -MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} -MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} -MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} -% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; -% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. -% -% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make -% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then -% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} -MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} -MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} -MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} -MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} -MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} -%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 -%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> -%% Change file names in leading comment -% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation -% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. -% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 -% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the -% corresponding changes to -% phyjabb.bib -% phyjabb.btx -MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} -MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} -MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} -MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} -MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} -MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} -MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} -MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} -MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} -MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} -MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} -MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} -MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} -MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} -MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} -MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} -MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} -MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} -MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} -MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} -MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} -MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} -MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} -MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} -MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} -MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} -MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} -MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} -MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} -MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} -MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} -MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} -MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} -MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} -MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} -MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} -MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} -MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} -MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} -MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} -MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} -MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} -MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} -MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} -MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} -MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} -% Now we read in the .BIB entries. -READ -% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's -% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting -% -% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len -% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the -% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels -% -% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of -% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, -% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; -% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). -% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just -% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), -% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean -% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we -% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. -% -% format.lab.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% if numnames > 1 then -% if numnames > 4 then -% namesleft := 3 -% else -% namesleft := numnames -% nameptr := 1 -% nameresult := "" -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% if (name_ptr = numnames) and -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else nameresult := nameresult * -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% if numnames > 4 then -% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else -% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token -% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) -% else -% nameresult := t -% fi -% fi -% return nameresult -% END -% -% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label -% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always -% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, -% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part -% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any -% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. -% -% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of -% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and -% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might -% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field -% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). -% -% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which -% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or -% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, -% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last -% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields -% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use -% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. -% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed -% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). -% -% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. -% -% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from -% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s -% until after sorting. -% -% calc.label == -% BEGIN -% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then -% author.editor.key.label -% else if type$ = "proceedings" then -% editor.key.organization.label -% else if type$ = "manual" then -% author.key.organization.label -% else -% author.key.label -% fi fi fi -% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) -% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label -% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits -% END -% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. -% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated -% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" -% come before "brinch hansen per". -% -% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by -% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization -% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on -% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title -% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). -% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. -% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank -% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves -% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, -% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), -% and four will separate year from title. -% -% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in -% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated -% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same -% as format.names. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted -% -% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's -% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward -% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass -% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there -% are 'b's). -% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -% -% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string -% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer -% -% initialize.longest.label == -% BEGIN -% longest.label := "" -% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) -% next.extra := "" -% longest.label.width := 0 -% last.extra.num := 0 -% END -% -% forward.pass == -% BEGIN -% if last.sort.label = sort.label then -% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 -% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) -% else -% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") -% extra.label := "" -% last.sort.label := sort.label -% fi -% END -% -% reverse.pass == -% BEGIN -% if next.extra = "b" then -% extra.label := "a" -% fi -% label := label * extra.label -% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then -% longest.label := label -% longest.label.width := width$(label) -% fi -% next.extra := extra.label -% END -% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. -% We use either the sorted order or original order. -% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -STRINGS { longest.label } -INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } -FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} -{ "" 'longest.label := - #1 'number.label := - #0 'longest.label.width := -} -FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} -{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := - number.label #1 + 'number.label := - label width$ longest.label.width > - { label 'longest.label := - label width$ 'longest.label.width := - } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} -ITERATE {longest.label.pass} -% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. -% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic -% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. -% Then we give an incantation containing the command -% \begin{thebibliography}{...} -% where the `...' is the longest label. -% -% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. -FUNCTION {begin.bib} -{ preamble$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {begin.bib} -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} -% Now we produce the output for all the entries -ITERATE {call.type$} -% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phiaea.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phiaea.bst deleted file mode 100644 index 90dbdedac18..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phiaea.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1889 +0,0 @@ -% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). -% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. - % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) - % of any bugs, improvements, etc. -% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written -% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put -% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles -% "C preprocessor" -% t) -% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with -% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx -% and run cpp with e.g., -% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> -% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. -% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) -% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles -% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last -% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. -% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles -% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles -% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers -% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) -% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles -% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles -% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets -% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles -% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries -% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. -% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals -% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation -% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note -% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) -% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. -% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" -% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels -% KEY_CITE: use key as label -% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations -% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps -% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name -% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. -% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections -% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. -% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. -% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to -% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. -% These are the original macros - % For 1 Conferences -% same as NF except for 0 and 0 set to 1 -% This is the start of btxbst.doc -% BibTeX `plain' family - % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. - % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. - % Copying of this file is authorized only if either - % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or - % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than - % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. - % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. - % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. -% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in -% these standard styles or in this documentation file. -% -% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, -% and is also a template file that you can use to make -% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. -% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like -% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt -% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt -% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt -% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt -% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. -% If you don't have access, -% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, -% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. -% -% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain -% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence -% #if VAR -% lines to be included when VAR is not zero -% #else -% lines to be included when VAR is zero -% #endif -% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of -% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. -% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. -% Variables can be set by -% #define VAR value -% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef -% to see if it has none. -% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines -% after the #if only if VAR is zero. -% -% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables -% so you can spot them easily -% -% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA -% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), -% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the -% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. -% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. -% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: -% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric -% label is used) -% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) -% and other info, like authors (if false, then -% entries remain in order of occurrence) -% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as -% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first -% names become initials) -% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be -% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or -% first letter after a colon -% (if false then they appear as in the database) -% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then -% they're abbreviated) -% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full -% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently -% as they appear in ACM publications) -%# define PLAIN 1 -% -% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen -% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized -% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence -% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). -% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry -% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) -% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break -% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, -% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; -% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. -% -% Citation alphabetic label format: -% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) -% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors -% -% Citation label numberic format: -% [number] -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: -% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever -% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, -% then title -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: -% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes -% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title -% -% Reference list ordering for unsorted: -% by the order cited in the text -% -% History -% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. -% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. -% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. -% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. -% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. -% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: -% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; -% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. -% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: -% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; -% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; -% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace -% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; -% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; -% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; -% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a -% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; -% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; -% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just -% the fields they're supposed to; -% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; -% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. -% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; -% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow -% either volume or number, not just volume; -% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; -% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field -% to tell where a conference was held; -% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume -% or number, and also a series field; -% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than -% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; -% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; -% MANUAL now prints out the organization in -% the first block if the author field is empty; -% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. -% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three -% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this -% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the -% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. -% -% The ENTRY declaration -% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), -% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. -% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't -% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields -% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. -ENTRY -% Fields: - { address -% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. -% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the -% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major -% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, -% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry -% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if -% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. -% annote -% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). - author -% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. - booktitle -% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. -% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. - chapter -% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. - edition -% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). - editor -% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. -% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be -% for the book or collection that the work appears in. - howpublished -% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). - institution -% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. - journal -% Journal name (macros are provided for many). - key -% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key -% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). - month -% Month (macros are provided). - note -% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). - number -% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. - organization -% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if -% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces -% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately -% condensed organization information in the key field as well. - pages -% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' -% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). - publisher -% Publisher name. - school -% School name (for theses). - series -% The name of a series or set of books. -% An individual book will will also have it's own title. - title -% The title of the thing you're referred to. - type -% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of -% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a -% thesis; or of a part of a book. - volume -% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. - year -% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end -% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). - } -% There are no integer entry variables - {} -% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. -% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. - { label } -% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the -% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields -% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions -% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), -% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. -% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the -% entry. -% -% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': -% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent -% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than -% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to -% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should -% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be -% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is -% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two -% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between -% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two -% successive new.block's. -% -% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. -% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be -% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come -% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending -% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. -% -% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. -% It will be one of these values: -% before.all just after the \bibitem -% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed -% if more sentence is output -% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed -% after.block just after a block (and sentence): -% period and \newblock needed. -% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence -% -% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output -% -% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) -% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed -% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of -% occurrence. -% -% output.nonnull(s) == -% BEGIN -% s := argument on stack -% if output.state = mid.sentence then -% write$(pop() * ", ") -% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top -% else -% if output.state = after.block then -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% write$("\newblock ") -% else -% if output.state = before.all then -% write$(pop()) -% else -- output.state should be after.sentence -% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") -% fi -% fi -% output.state := mid.sentence -% fi -% push s on stack -% END -% -% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; -% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) -% -% output(s) == -% BEGIN -% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if -% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty -% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; -% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when -% such fields are empty). -% -% output.check(s,t) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) -% else output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry -% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator -% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack -% as per the output convention. -% -% output.bibitem == -% BEGIN -% newline$ -% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, -% write$(label) % these three lines -% write$("]{") % are used -% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels -% write$(cite$) -% write$("}") -% push "" on stack -% output.state := before.all -% END -% -% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the -% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all -% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, -% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the -% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) -% -% fin.entry == -% BEGIN -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% END -% -% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and -% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. -% -% new.block == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.block -% fi -% END -% -% new.sentence == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> after.block then -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.sentence -% fi -% fi -% END -% -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} -% the variables s and t are temporary string holders -STRINGS { s t } -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { "," * write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - "\bibitem{" write$ - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} -% This function finishes all entries. -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ skip$ -} -% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack -% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. -% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because -% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The -% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; -% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. -FUNCTION {new.block.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. -% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by -% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), -% or they produce the null string. -% -% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the -% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no -% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) -% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. -% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. -% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the -% stack is a string rather than a missing field. -% -% field.or.null(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return s -% END -% -% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, -% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic -% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation -% will follow the result. -% -% emphasize(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return "{\em " * s * "}" -% -% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in -% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas -% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last -% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always -% contain at least one name. -% -% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER -% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% format.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% nameptr := 1 -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% namesleft := numnames -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% % for full names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% % for abbreviated first names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% if nameptr > 1 then -% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t -% else if numnames > 2 -% then nameresult := nameresult * "," -% fi -% if t = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." -% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t -% fi -% fi -% else nameresult := t -% fi -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% return nameresult -% END -% -% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) -% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string -% -% format.authors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then return "" -% else return format.names(author) -% fi -% END -% -% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, -% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" -% -% format.editors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(editor) then return "" -% else -% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then -% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" -% else -% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" -% fi -% fi -% END -% -% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be -% given for them. -% -% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and -% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {embolden} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {paren} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "(" swap$ * ")" * } - if$ -} -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } -INTEGERS { etal } -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames #1 > - s numnames "{ll}" format.name$ "others" = numnames #1 > and - or 'etal := - etal - { #1 #1 + 'namesleft := } - { numnames 'namesleft := } - if$ - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first - t "others" = - 'skip$ - { t "u" change.case$ 't := } - if$ - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { nameptr #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - etal or - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { ", editors" * } - { ", editor" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.edited} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { "edited by " editor format.names * } - if$ -} -% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. -% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, -% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), -% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; -% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - { title "t" change.case$ } - if$ -} -% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX -% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. -% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to -% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. -% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) -% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' -% if it's not already -% -% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% n.dashify(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% pageresult := "" -% while (not empty$(t)) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-") -% then -% if (next character isn't) -% then -% pageresult := pageresult * "--" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% else -% while (first character of t = "-") -% do -% pageresult := pageresult * "-" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% od -% fi -% else -% pageresult := pageresult * the first character -% t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return pageresult -% END -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {first.page} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ -} -% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if -% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string -% if they're both empty. -FUNCTION {format.date} -{ year empty$ - { "" } - 'year - if$ -} -% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like -% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title emphasize -} -% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a -% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). -% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two -% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between -% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: -% -% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == -% BEGIN -% if text.length$(str2) < 3 -% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 -% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 -% END -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} -% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair -% are nonempty. -% -% either.or.check(t,s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) -% fi -% END -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} -% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps -% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field -% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume -% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), -% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} -% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name -% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to -% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the -% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either -% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. -% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field -% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title -% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". -% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} -% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. -% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because -% this doesn't start a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book -% (and in rare circumstances, an article). -% -% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" -% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. -% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" -% -% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) -% -% multi.page.check(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% multiresult := false -% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") -% then multiresult := true -% else t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return multiresult -% END -INTEGERS { multiresult } -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} -% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. -% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check - { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.pages.a} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { "page" pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range -% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some -% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null embolden - " " swap$ * * - format.date empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.date paren } - { " " * format.date paren * } - if$ - } - if$ - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages.a } - { " " * pages first.page *} - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the -% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. -% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence -% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one -% exists. -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "in " booktitle emphasize * } - { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and -% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. -FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} -{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ - month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ - and and and and and - { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, -% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack -% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} -% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" -% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; -% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. -% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "Technical Report" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because -% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving -% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature -% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled -% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for -% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; -% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; -% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Each of these is explained in more detail later. -% -% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is -% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- -% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be -% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). -% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry -% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. -% -% format.article.crossref == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(key) then -% if empty$(journal) then -% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * -% " to crossref " * crossref) -% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% else -% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * -% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% else -% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% END -% -% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ key empty$ - { journal empty$ - { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * - warning$ - "" - } - { "In " journal * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either -% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on -% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. -FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} -{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ - editor num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a -% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). -% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the -% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series -% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { series empty$ - { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" * - } - { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { key * } - if$ - } - { format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the -% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct -% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else -% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { booktitle empty$ - { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - } - { "In " format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear -% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These -% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for -% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the -% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. -% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, -% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. -% -% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may -% CROSSREF another article. -% Required fields: author, title, journal, year -% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note -% -% article == -% BEGIN -% output.bibitem -% output.check(format.authors,"author") -% new.block -% output.check(format.title,"title") -% new.block -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") -% output(format.vol.num.pages) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% else -% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) -% output(format.pages) -% fi -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. -% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year -% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, -% note -% -% book == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") -% else output.check(format.authors,"author") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) -% fi -% fi -% new.block -% output.check(format.btitle,"title") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output(format.bvolume) -% new.block -% output(format.number.series) -% new.sentence -% output.check(publisher,"publisher") -% output(address) -% else -% new.block -% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) -% fi -% output(format.edition) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal field.or.null - format.vol.num.pages output - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - howpublished address new.block.checkb - howpublished output - address output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. -% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. -% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field -% will come before number and series. -% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year -% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title -% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). -% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, -% address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may -% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) -% will appear just before note. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address empty$ - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - organization output - publisher output - } - if$ - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } -% A manual is technical documentation. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output.nonnull - address output - } - if$ - } - { format.authors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { address new.block.checka - address output - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - { organization address new.block.checkb - organization output - address output - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. -% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields -% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - title howpublished new.block.checkb - format.title output - howpublished new.block.checka - howpublished output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry - empty.misc.check -} -% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. -% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will -% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); -% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. -% Required: title, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - editor empty$ - { organization output } - { format.editors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address empty$ - { editor empty$ - { publisher new.sentence.checka } - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - } - if$ - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - editor empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output } - if$ - publisher output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A techreport is a technical report. -% Required: author, title, institution, year -% Optional: type, number, address, month, note -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - format.tr.number output.nonnull - institution "institution" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. -% Required: author, title, note -% Optional: month, year -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - format.date output - fin.entry -} -% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } -% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. -% Users are encouraged to use these macros. -% -% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated -MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} -MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} -MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} -MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} -MACRO {may} {"May"} -MACRO {jun} {"June"} -MACRO {jul} {"July"} -MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} -MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} -MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} -MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} -MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} -% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; -% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. -% -% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make -% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then -% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} -MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} -MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} -MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} -MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} -MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} -%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 -%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> -%% Change file names in leading comment -% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation -% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. -% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 -% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the -% corresponding changes to -% phyjabb.bib -% phyjabb.btx -MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} -MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} -MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} -MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} -MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} -MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} -MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} -MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} -MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} -MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} -MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} -MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} -MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} -MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} -MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} -MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} -MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} -MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} -MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} -MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} -MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} -MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} -MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} -MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} -MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} -MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} -MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} -MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} -MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} -MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} -MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} -MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} -MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} -MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} -MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} -MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} -MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} -MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} -MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} -MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} -MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} -MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} -MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} -MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} -MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} -MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} -% Now we read in the .BIB entries. -READ -% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's -% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting -% -% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len -% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the -% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels -% -% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of -% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, -% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; -% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). -% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just -% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), -% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean -% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we -% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. -% -% format.lab.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% if numnames > 1 then -% if numnames > 4 then -% namesleft := 3 -% else -% namesleft := numnames -% nameptr := 1 -% nameresult := "" -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% if (name_ptr = numnames) and -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else nameresult := nameresult * -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% if numnames > 4 then -% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else -% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token -% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) -% else -% nameresult := t -% fi -% fi -% return nameresult -% END -% -% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label -% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always -% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, -% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part -% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any -% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. -% -% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of -% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and -% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might -% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field -% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). -% -% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which -% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or -% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, -% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last -% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields -% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use -% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. -% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed -% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). -% -% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. -% -% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from -% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s -% until after sorting. -% -% calc.label == -% BEGIN -% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then -% author.editor.key.label -% else if type$ = "proceedings" then -% editor.key.organization.label -% else if type$ = "manual" then -% author.key.organization.label -% else -% author.key.label -% fi fi fi -% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) -% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label -% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits -% END -% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. -% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated -% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" -% come before "brinch hansen per". -% -% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by -% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization -% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on -% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title -% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). -% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. -% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank -% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves -% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, -% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), -% and four will separate year from title. -% -% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in -% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated -% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same -% as format.names. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted -% -% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's -% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward -% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass -% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there -% are 'b's). -% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -% -% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string -% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer -% -% initialize.longest.label == -% BEGIN -% longest.label := "" -% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) -% next.extra := "" -% longest.label.width := 0 -% last.extra.num := 0 -% END -% -% forward.pass == -% BEGIN -% if last.sort.label = sort.label then -% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 -% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) -% else -% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") -% extra.label := "" -% last.sort.label := sort.label -% fi -% END -% -% reverse.pass == -% BEGIN -% if next.extra = "b" then -% extra.label := "a" -% fi -% label := label * extra.label -% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then -% longest.label := label -% longest.label.width := width$(label) -% fi -% next.extra := extra.label -% END -% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. -% We use either the sorted order or original order. -% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -STRINGS { longest.label } -INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } -FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} -{ "" 'longest.label := - #1 'number.label := - #0 'longest.label.width := -} -FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} -{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := - number.label #1 + 'number.label := - label width$ longest.label.width > - { label 'longest.label := - label width$ 'longest.label.width := - } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} -ITERATE {longest.label.pass} -% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. -% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic -% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. -% Then we give an incantation containing the command -% \begin{thebibliography}{...} -% where the `...' is the longest label. -% -% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. -FUNCTION {begin.bib} -{ preamble$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {begin.bib} -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} -% Now we produce the output for all the entries -ITERATE {call.type$} -% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phjcp.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phjcp.bst deleted file mode 100644 index f3f804a6c7e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phjcp.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1888 +0,0 @@ -% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). -% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. - % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) - % of any bugs, improvements, etc. -% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written -% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put -% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles -% "C preprocessor" -% t) -% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with -% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx -% and run cpp with e.g., -% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> -% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. -% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) -% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles -% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last -% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. -% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles -% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles -% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers -% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) -% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles -% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles -% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets -% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles -% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries -% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. -% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals -% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation -% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note -% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) -% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. -% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" -% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels -% KEY_CITE: use key as label -% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations -% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps -% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name -% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. -% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections -% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. -% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. -% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to -% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. -% These are the original macros - % For Journal of Computational Physics - % Cris Barnes and Dave Mikkelson, 9/25/89 -% This is the start of btxbst.doc -% BibTeX `plain' family - % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. - % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. - % Copying of this file is authorized only if either - % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or - % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than - % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. - % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. - % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. -% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in -% these standard styles or in this documentation file. -% -% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, -% and is also a template file that you can use to make -% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. -% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like -% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt -% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt -% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt -% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt -% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. -% If you don't have access, -% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, -% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. -% -% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain -% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence -% #if VAR -% lines to be included when VAR is not zero -% #else -% lines to be included when VAR is zero -% #endif -% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of -% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. -% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. -% Variables can be set by -% #define VAR value -% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef -% to see if it has none. -% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines -% after the #if only if VAR is zero. -% -% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables -% so you can spot them easily -% -% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA -% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), -% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the -% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. -% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. -% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: -% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric -% label is used) -% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) -% and other info, like authors (if false, then -% entries remain in order of occurrence) -% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as -% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first -% names become initials) -% 0: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be -% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or -% first letter after a colon -% (if false then they appear as in the database) -% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then -% they're abbreviated) -% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full -% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently -% as they appear in ACM publications) -%# define PLAIN 1 -% -% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen -% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized -% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence -% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). -% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry -% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) -% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break -% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, -% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; -% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. -% -% Citation alphabetic label format: -% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) -% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors -% -% Citation label numberic format: -% [number] -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: -% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever -% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, -% then title -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: -% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes -% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title -% -% Reference list ordering for unsorted: -% by the order cited in the text -% -% History -% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. -% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. -% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. -% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. -% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. -% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: -% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; -% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. -% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: -% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; -% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; -% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace -% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; -% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; -% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; -% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a -% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; -% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; -% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just -% the fields they're supposed to; -% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; -% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. -% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; -% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow -% either volume or number, not just volume; -% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; -% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field -% to tell where a conference was held; -% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume -% or number, and also a series field; -% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than -% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; -% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; -% MANUAL now prints out the organization in -% the first block if the author field is empty; -% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. -% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three -% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this -% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the -% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. -% -% The ENTRY declaration -% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), -% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. -% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't -% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields -% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. -ENTRY -% Fields: - { address -% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. -% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the -% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major -% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, -% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry -% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if -% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. -% annote -% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). - author -% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. - booktitle -% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. -% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. - chapter -% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. - edition -% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). - editor -% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. -% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be -% for the book or collection that the work appears in. - howpublished -% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). - institution -% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. - journal -% Journal name (macros are provided for many). - key -% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key -% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). - month -% Month (macros are provided). - note -% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). - number -% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. - organization -% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if -% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces -% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately -% condensed organization information in the key field as well. - pages -% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' -% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). - publisher -% Publisher name. - school -% School name (for theses). - series -% The name of a series or set of books. -% An individual book will will also have it's own title. - title -% The title of the thing you're referred to. - type -% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of -% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a -% thesis; or of a part of a book. - volume -% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. - year -% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end -% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). - } -% There are no integer entry variables - {} -% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. -% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. - { label } -% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the -% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields -% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions -% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), -% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. -% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the -% entry. -% -% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': -% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent -% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than -% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to -% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should -% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be -% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is -% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two -% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between -% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two -% successive new.block's. -% -% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. -% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be -% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come -% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending -% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. -% -% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. -% It will be one of these values: -% before.all just after the \bibitem -% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed -% if more sentence is output -% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed -% after.block just after a block (and sentence): -% period and \newblock needed. -% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence -% -% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output -% -% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) -% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed -% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of -% occurrence. -% -% output.nonnull(s) == -% BEGIN -% s := argument on stack -% if output.state = mid.sentence then -% write$(pop() * ", ") -% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top -% else -% if output.state = after.block then -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% write$("\newblock ") -% else -% if output.state = before.all then -% write$(pop()) -% else -- output.state should be after.sentence -% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") -% fi -% fi -% output.state := mid.sentence -% fi -% push s on stack -% END -% -% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; -% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) -% -% output(s) == -% BEGIN -% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if -% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty -% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; -% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when -% such fields are empty). -% -% output.check(s,t) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) -% else output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry -% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator -% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack -% as per the output convention. -% -% output.bibitem == -% BEGIN -% newline$ -% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, -% write$(label) % these three lines -% write$("]{") % are used -% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels -% write$(cite$) -% write$("}") -% push "" on stack -% output.state := before.all -% END -% -% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the -% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all -% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, -% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the -% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) -% -% fin.entry == -% BEGIN -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% END -% -% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and -% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. -% -% new.block == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.block -% fi -% END -% -% new.sentence == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> after.block then -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.sentence -% fi -% fi -% END -% -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} -% the variables s and t are temporary string holders -STRINGS { s t } -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { "," * write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - "\bibitem{" write$ - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} -% This function finishes all entries. -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ skip$ -} -% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack -% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. -% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because -% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The -% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; -% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. -FUNCTION {new.block.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. -% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by -% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), -% or they produce the null string. -% -% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the -% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no -% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) -% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. -% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. -% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the -% stack is a string rather than a missing field. -% -% field.or.null(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return s -% END -% -% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, -% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic -% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation -% will follow the result. -% -% emphasize(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return "{\em " * s * "}" -% -% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in -% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas -% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last -% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always -% contain at least one name. -% -% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER -% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% format.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% nameptr := 1 -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% namesleft := numnames -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% % for full names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% % for abbreviated first names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% if nameptr > 1 then -% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t -% else if numnames > 2 -% then nameresult := nameresult * "," -% fi -% if t = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." -% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t -% fi -% fi -% else nameresult := t -% fi -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% return nameresult -% END -% -% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) -% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string -% -% format.authors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then return "" -% else return format.names(author) -% fi -% END -% -% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, -% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" -% -% format.editors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(editor) then return "" -% else -% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then -% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" -% else -% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" -% fi -% fi -% END -% -% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be -% given for them. -% -% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and -% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {caps} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\sc " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {embolden} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {paren} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "(" swap$ * ")" * } - if$ -} -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := - t "others" = - 'skip$ - { t caps 't := } - if$ - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { numnames #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { ", editors" * } - { ", editor" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.edited} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { "edited by " editor format.names * } - if$ -} -% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. -% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, -% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), -% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; -% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - 'title - if$ -} -% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX -% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. -% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to -% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. -% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) -% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' -% if it's not already -% -% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% n.dashify(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% pageresult := "" -% while (not empty$(t)) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-") -% then -% if (next character isn't) -% then -% pageresult := pageresult * "--" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% else -% while (first character of t = "-") -% do -% pageresult := pageresult * "-" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% od -% fi -% else -% pageresult := pageresult * the first character -% t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return pageresult -% END -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {first.page} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ -} -% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if -% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string -% if they're both empty. -FUNCTION {format.date} -{ year empty$ - { "" } - 'year - if$ -} -% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like -% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title emphasize -} -% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a -% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). -% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two -% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between -% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: -% -% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == -% BEGIN -% if text.length$(str2) < 3 -% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 -% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 -% END -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} -% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair -% are nonempty. -% -% either.or.check(t,s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) -% fi -% END -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} -% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps -% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field -% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume -% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), -% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} -% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name -% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to -% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the -% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either -% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. -% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field -% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title -% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". -% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} -% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. -% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because -% this doesn't start a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book -% (and in rare circumstances, an article). -% -% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" -% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. -% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" -% -% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) -% -% multi.page.check(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% multiresult := false -% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") -% then multiresult := true -% else t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return multiresult -% END -INTEGERS { multiresult } -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} -% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. -% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check - { "pp." pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "p." pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.pages.a} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { "p." pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range -% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some -% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null embolden - " " swap$ * * - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages.a } - { ", " * pages first.page * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the -% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. -% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence -% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one -% exists. -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "in " booktitle emphasize * } - { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and -% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. -FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} -{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ - month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ - and and and and and - { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, -% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack -% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} -% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" -% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; -% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. -% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "Technical Report" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because -% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving -% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature -% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled -% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for -% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; -% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; -% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Each of these is explained in more detail later. -% -% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is -% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- -% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be -% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). -% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry -% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. -% -% format.article.crossref == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(key) then -% if empty$(journal) then -% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * -% " to crossref " * crossref) -% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% else -% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * -% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% else -% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% END -% -% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ key empty$ - { journal empty$ - { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * - warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " journal * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either -% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on -% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. -FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} -{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ caps - editor num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ caps * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a -% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). -% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the -% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series -% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { series empty$ - { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" * - } - { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { key * } - if$ - } - { format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the -% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct -% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else -% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { booktitle empty$ - { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - } - { "In " format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear -% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These -% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for -% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the -% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. -% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, -% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. -% -% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may -% CROSSREF another article. -% Required fields: author, title, journal, year -% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note -% -% article == -% BEGIN -% output.bibitem -% output.check(format.authors,"author") -% new.block -% output.check(format.title,"title") -% new.block -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") -% output(format.vol.num.pages) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% else -% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) -% output(format.pages) -% fi -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. -% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year -% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, -% note -% -% book == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") -% else output.check(format.authors,"author") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) -% fi -% fi -% new.block -% output.check(format.btitle,"title") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output(format.bvolume) -% new.block -% output(format.number.series) -% new.sentence -% output.check(publisher,"publisher") -% output(address) -% else -% new.block -% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) -% fi -% output(format.edition) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal emphasize - format.vol.num.pages - format.date empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.date paren } - { " " * format.date paren * } - if$ - } - if$ - output - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - howpublished address new.block.checkb - howpublished output - address output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. -% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. -% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field -% will come before number and series. -% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year -% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title -% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). -% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, -% address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may -% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) -% will appear just before note. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address empty$ - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - organization output - publisher output - } - if$ - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } -% A manual is technical documentation. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output.nonnull - address output - } - if$ - } - { format.authors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { address new.block.checka - address output - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - { organization address new.block.checkb - organization output - address output - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. -% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields -% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - title howpublished new.block.checkb - format.title output - howpublished new.block.checka - howpublished output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry - empty.misc.check -} -% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. -% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will -% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); -% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. -% Required: title, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - editor empty$ - { organization output } - { format.editors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address empty$ - { editor empty$ - { publisher new.sentence.checka } - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - } - if$ - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - editor empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output } - if$ - publisher output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A techreport is a technical report. -% Required: author, title, institution, year -% Optional: type, number, address, month, note -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - format.tr.number output.nonnull - institution "institution" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. -% Required: author, title, note -% Optional: month, year -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - format.date output - fin.entry -} -% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } -% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. -% Users are encouraged to use these macros. -% -% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated -MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} -MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} -MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} -MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} -MACRO {may} {"May"} -MACRO {jun} {"June"} -MACRO {jul} {"July"} -MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} -MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} -MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} -MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} -MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} -% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; -% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. -% -% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make -% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then -% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} -MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} -MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} -MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} -MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} -MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} -%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 -%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> -%% Change file names in leading comment -% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation -% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. -% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 -% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the -% corresponding changes to -% phyjabb.bib -% phyjabb.btx -MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} -MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} -MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} -MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} -MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} -MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} -MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} -MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} -MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} -MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} -MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} -MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} -MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} -MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} -MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} -MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} -MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} -MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} -MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} -MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} -MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} -MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} -MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} -MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} -MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} -MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} -MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} -MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} -MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} -MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} -MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} -MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} -MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} -MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} -MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} -MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} -MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} -MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} -MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} -MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} -MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} -MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} -MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} -MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} -MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} -MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} -% Now we read in the .BIB entries. -READ -% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's -% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting -% -% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len -% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the -% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels -% -% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of -% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, -% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; -% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). -% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just -% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), -% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean -% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we -% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. -% -% format.lab.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% if numnames > 1 then -% if numnames > 4 then -% namesleft := 3 -% else -% namesleft := numnames -% nameptr := 1 -% nameresult := "" -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% if (name_ptr = numnames) and -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else nameresult := nameresult * -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% if numnames > 4 then -% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else -% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token -% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) -% else -% nameresult := t -% fi -% fi -% return nameresult -% END -% -% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label -% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always -% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, -% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part -% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any -% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. -% -% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of -% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and -% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might -% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field -% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). -% -% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which -% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or -% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, -% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last -% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields -% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use -% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. -% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed -% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). -% -% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. -% -% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from -% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s -% until after sorting. -% -% calc.label == -% BEGIN -% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then -% author.editor.key.label -% else if type$ = "proceedings" then -% editor.key.organization.label -% else if type$ = "manual" then -% author.key.organization.label -% else -% author.key.label -% fi fi fi -% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) -% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label -% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits -% END -% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. -% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated -% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" -% come before "brinch hansen per". -% -% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by -% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization -% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on -% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title -% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). -% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. -% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank -% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves -% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, -% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), -% and four will separate year from title. -% -% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in -% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated -% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same -% as format.names. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted -% -% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's -% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward -% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass -% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there -% are 'b's). -% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -% -% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string -% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer -% -% initialize.longest.label == -% BEGIN -% longest.label := "" -% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) -% next.extra := "" -% longest.label.width := 0 -% last.extra.num := 0 -% END -% -% forward.pass == -% BEGIN -% if last.sort.label = sort.label then -% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 -% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) -% else -% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") -% extra.label := "" -% last.sort.label := sort.label -% fi -% END -% -% reverse.pass == -% BEGIN -% if next.extra = "b" then -% extra.label := "a" -% fi -% label := label * extra.label -% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then -% longest.label := label -% longest.label.width := width$(label) -% fi -% next.extra := extra.label -% END -% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. -% We use either the sorted order or original order. -% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -STRINGS { longest.label } -INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } -FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} -{ "" 'longest.label := - #1 'number.label := - #0 'longest.label.width := -} -FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} -{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := - number.label #1 + 'number.label := - label width$ longest.label.width > - { label 'longest.label := - label width$ 'longest.label.width := - } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} -ITERATE {longest.label.pass} -% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. -% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic -% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. -% Then we give an incantation containing the command -% \begin{thebibliography}{...} -% where the `...' is the longest label. -% -% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. -FUNCTION {begin.bib} -{ preamble$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {begin.bib} -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} -% Now we produce the output for all the entries -ITERATE {call.type$} -% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phnf.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phnf.bst deleted file mode 100644 index 7c833bb8252..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phnf.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1890 +0,0 @@ -% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). -% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. - % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) - % of any bugs, improvements, etc. -% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written -% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put -% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles -% "C preprocessor" -% t) -% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with -% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx -% and run cpp with e.g., -% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> -% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. -% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) -% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles -% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last -% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. -% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles -% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles -% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers -% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) -% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles -% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles -% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets -% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles -% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries -% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. -% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals -% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation -% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note -% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) -% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. -% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" -% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels -% KEY_CITE: use key as label -% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations -% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps -% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name -% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. -% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections -% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. -% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. -% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to -% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. -% These are the original macros - % For Nuclear Fusion - % see Nuclear Fusion Vol. 28, No. 2 (1988), - % "Announcement [of] Guidelines for Bibliographical Citations" -% same as AIP except for 0, 0, 0 and -% 0 and 0 set to use only three names if there are -% 6 or more. Also, no 0, and use 0 and 0. -% There are still some nits to be picked (years in parentheses for -% other than journals, volumes having Vol. before them and pages not -% having p.) -% This is the start of btxbst.doc -% BibTeX `plain' family - % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. - % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. - % Copying of this file is authorized only if either - % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or - % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than - % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. - % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. - % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. -% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in -% these standard styles or in this documentation file. -% -% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, -% and is also a template file that you can use to make -% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. -% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like -% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt -% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt -% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt -% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt -% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. -% If you don't have access, -% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, -% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. -% -% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain -% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence -% #if VAR -% lines to be included when VAR is not zero -% #else -% lines to be included when VAR is zero -% #endif -% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of -% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. -% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. -% Variables can be set by -% #define VAR value -% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef -% to see if it has none. -% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines -% after the #if only if VAR is zero. -% -% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables -% so you can spot them easily -% -% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA -% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), -% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the -% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. -% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. -% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: -% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric -% label is used) -% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) -% and other info, like authors (if false, then -% entries remain in order of occurrence) -% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as -% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first -% names become initials) -% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be -% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or -% first letter after a colon -% (if false then they appear as in the database) -% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then -% they're abbreviated) -% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full -% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently -% as they appear in ACM publications) -%# define PLAIN 1 -% -% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen -% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized -% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence -% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). -% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry -% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) -% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break -% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, -% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; -% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. -% -% Citation alphabetic label format: -% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) -% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors -% -% Citation label numberic format: -% [number] -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: -% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever -% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, -% then title -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: -% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes -% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title -% -% Reference list ordering for unsorted: -% by the order cited in the text -% -% History -% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. -% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. -% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. -% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. -% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. -% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: -% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; -% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. -% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: -% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; -% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; -% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace -% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; -% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; -% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; -% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a -% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; -% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; -% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just -% the fields they're supposed to; -% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; -% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. -% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; -% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow -% either volume or number, not just volume; -% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; -% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field -% to tell where a conference was held; -% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume -% or number, and also a series field; -% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than -% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; -% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; -% MANUAL now prints out the organization in -% the first block if the author field is empty; -% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. -% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three -% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this -% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the -% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. -% -% The ENTRY declaration -% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), -% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. -% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't -% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields -% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. -ENTRY -% Fields: - { address -% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. -% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the -% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major -% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, -% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry -% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if -% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. -% annote -% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). - author -% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. - booktitle -% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. -% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. - chapter -% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. - edition -% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). - editor -% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. -% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be -% for the book or collection that the work appears in. - howpublished -% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). - institution -% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. - journal -% Journal name (macros are provided for many). - key -% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key -% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). - month -% Month (macros are provided). - note -% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). - number -% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. - organization -% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if -% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces -% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately -% condensed organization information in the key field as well. - pages -% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' -% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). - publisher -% Publisher name. - school -% School name (for theses). - series -% The name of a series or set of books. -% An individual book will will also have it's own title. - title -% The title of the thing you're referred to. - type -% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of -% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a -% thesis; or of a part of a book. - volume -% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. - year -% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end -% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). - } -% There are no integer entry variables - {} -% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. -% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. - { label } -% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the -% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields -% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions -% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), -% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. -% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the -% entry. -% -% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': -% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent -% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than -% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to -% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should -% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be -% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is -% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two -% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between -% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two -% successive new.block's. -% -% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. -% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be -% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come -% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending -% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. -% -% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. -% It will be one of these values: -% before.all just after the \bibitem -% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed -% if more sentence is output -% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed -% after.block just after a block (and sentence): -% period and \newblock needed. -% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence -% -% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output -% -% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) -% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed -% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of -% occurrence. -% -% output.nonnull(s) == -% BEGIN -% s := argument on stack -% if output.state = mid.sentence then -% write$(pop() * ", ") -% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top -% else -% if output.state = after.block then -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% write$("\newblock ") -% else -% if output.state = before.all then -% write$(pop()) -% else -- output.state should be after.sentence -% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") -% fi -% fi -% output.state := mid.sentence -% fi -% push s on stack -% END -% -% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; -% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) -% -% output(s) == -% BEGIN -% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if -% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty -% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; -% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when -% such fields are empty). -% -% output.check(s,t) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) -% else output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry -% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator -% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack -% as per the output convention. -% -% output.bibitem == -% BEGIN -% newline$ -% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, -% write$(label) % these three lines -% write$("]{") % are used -% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels -% write$(cite$) -% write$("}") -% push "" on stack -% output.state := before.all -% END -% -% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the -% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all -% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, -% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the -% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) -% -% fin.entry == -% BEGIN -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% END -% -% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and -% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. -% -% new.block == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.block -% fi -% END -% -% new.sentence == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> after.block then -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.sentence -% fi -% fi -% END -% -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} -% the variables s and t are temporary string holders -STRINGS { s t } -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { "," * write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - "\bibitem{" write$ - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} -% This function finishes all entries. -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ skip$ -} -% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack -% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. -% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because -% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The -% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; -% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. -FUNCTION {new.block.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. -% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by -% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), -% or they produce the null string. -% -% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the -% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no -% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) -% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. -% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. -% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the -% stack is a string rather than a missing field. -% -% field.or.null(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return s -% END -% -% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, -% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic -% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation -% will follow the result. -% -% emphasize(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return "{\em " * s * "}" -% -% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in -% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas -% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last -% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always -% contain at least one name. -% -% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER -% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% format.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% nameptr := 1 -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% namesleft := numnames -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% % for full names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% % for abbreviated first names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% if nameptr > 1 then -% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t -% else if numnames > 2 -% then nameresult := nameresult * "," -% fi -% if t = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." -% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t -% fi -% fi -% else nameresult := t -% fi -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% return nameresult -% END -% -% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) -% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string -% -% format.authors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then return "" -% else return format.names(author) -% fi -% END -% -% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, -% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" -% -% format.editors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(editor) then return "" -% else -% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then -% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" -% else -% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" -% fi -% fi -% END -% -% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be -% given for them. -% -% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and -% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {embolden} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {paren} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "(" swap$ * ")" * } - if$ -} -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } -INTEGERS { etal } -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames #5 > - s numnames "{ll}" format.name$ "others" = numnames #3 > and - or 'etal := - etal - { #3 #1 + 'namesleft := } - { numnames 'namesleft := } - if$ - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first - t "others" = - 'skip$ - { t "u" change.case$ 't := } - if$ - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { nameptr #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - etal or - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { ", editors" * } - { ", editor" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. -% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, -% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), -% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; -% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - { title "t" change.case$ } - if$ -} -% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX -% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. -% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to -% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. -% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) -% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' -% if it's not already -% -% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% n.dashify(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% pageresult := "" -% while (not empty$(t)) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-") -% then -% if (next character isn't) -% then -% pageresult := pageresult * "--" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% else -% while (first character of t = "-") -% do -% pageresult := pageresult * "-" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% od -% fi -% else -% pageresult := pageresult * the first character -% t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return pageresult -% END -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {first.page} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ -} -% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if -% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string -% if they're both empty. -FUNCTION {format.date} -{ year empty$ - { "" } - 'year - if$ -} -% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like -% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title emphasize -} -% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a -% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). -% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two -% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between -% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: -% -% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == -% BEGIN -% if text.length$(str2) < 3 -% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 -% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 -% END -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} -% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair -% are nonempty. -% -% either.or.check(t,s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) -% fi -% END -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} -% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps -% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field -% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume -% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), -% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} -% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name -% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to -% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the -% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either -% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. -% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field -% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title -% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". -% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} -% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. -% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because -% this doesn't start a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book -% (and in rare circumstances, an article). -% -% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" -% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. -% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" -% -% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) -% -% multi.page.check(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% multiresult := false -% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") -% then multiresult := true -% else t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return multiresult -% END -INTEGERS { multiresult } -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} -% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. -% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check - { "pp." pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "p." pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.pages.a} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { "p." pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range -% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some -% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null embolden - " " swap$ * * - format.date empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.date paren } - { " " * format.date paren * } - if$ - } - if$ - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages.a } - { " " * pages first.page *} - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the -% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. -% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence -% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one -% exists. -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "in " booktitle emphasize * } - { "in " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and -% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. -FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} -{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ - month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ - and and and and and - { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, -% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack -% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} -% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" -% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; -% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. -% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "Technical Report" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because -% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving -% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature -% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled -% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for -% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; -% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; -% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Each of these is explained in more detail later. -% -% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is -% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- -% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be -% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). -% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry -% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. -% -% format.article.crossref == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(key) then -% if empty$(journal) then -% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * -% " to crossref " * crossref) -% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% else -% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * -% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% else -% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% END -% -% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ key empty$ - { journal empty$ - { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * - warning$ - "" - } - { "In " journal * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either -% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on -% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. -FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} -{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ - editor num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a -% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). -% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the -% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series -% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { series empty$ - { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" * - } - { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { key * } - if$ - } - { format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the -% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct -% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else -% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { booktitle empty$ - { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - } - { "In " format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear -% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These -% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for -% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the -% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. -% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, -% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. -% -% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may -% CROSSREF another article. -% Required fields: author, title, journal, year -% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note -% -% article == -% BEGIN -% output.bibitem -% output.check(format.authors,"author") -% new.block -% output.check(format.title,"title") -% new.block -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") -% output(format.vol.num.pages) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% else -% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) -% output(format.pages) -% fi -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. -% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year -% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, -% note -% -% book == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") -% else output.check(format.authors,"author") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) -% fi -% fi -% new.block -% output.check(format.btitle,"title") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output(format.bvolume) -% new.block -% output(format.number.series) -% new.sentence -% output.check(publisher,"publisher") -% output(address) -% else -% new.block -% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) -% fi -% output(format.edition) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal field.or.null - format.vol.num.pages output - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - howpublished address new.block.checkb - howpublished output - address output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. -% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. -% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field -% will come before number and series. -% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year -% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title -% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). -% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, -% address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may -% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) -% will appear just before note. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address empty$ - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - organization output - publisher output - } - if$ - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } -% A manual is technical documentation. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output.nonnull - address output - } - if$ - } - { format.authors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { address new.block.checka - address output - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - { organization address new.block.checkb - organization output - address output - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. -% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields -% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - title howpublished new.block.checkb - format.title output - howpublished new.block.checka - howpublished output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry - empty.misc.check -} -% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. -% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will -% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); -% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. -% Required: title, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - editor empty$ - { organization output } - { format.editors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address empty$ - { editor empty$ - { publisher new.sentence.checka } - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - } - if$ - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - editor empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output } - if$ - publisher output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A techreport is a technical report. -% Required: author, title, institution, year -% Optional: type, number, address, month, note -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - format.tr.number output.nonnull - institution "institution" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. -% Required: author, title, note -% Optional: month, year -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - format.date output - fin.entry -} -% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } -% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. -% Users are encouraged to use these macros. -% -% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated -MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} -MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} -MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} -MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} -MACRO {may} {"May"} -MACRO {jun} {"June"} -MACRO {jul} {"July"} -MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} -MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} -MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} -MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} -MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} -% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; -% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. -% -% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make -% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then -% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} -MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} -MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} -MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} -MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} -MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} -%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 -%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> -%% Change file names in leading comment -% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation -% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. -% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 -% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the -% corresponding changes to -% phyjabb.bib -% phyjabb.btx -MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} -MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} -MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} -MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} -MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} -MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} -MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} -MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} -MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} -MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} -MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} -MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} -MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} -MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} -MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} -MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} -MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} -MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} -MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} -MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} -MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} -MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} -MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} -MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} -MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} -MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} -MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} -MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} -MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} -MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} -MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} -MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} -MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} -MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} -MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} -MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} -MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} -MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} -MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} -MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} -MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} -MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} -MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} -MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} -MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} -MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} -% Now we read in the .BIB entries. -READ -% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's -% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting -% -% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len -% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the -% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels -% -% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of -% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, -% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; -% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). -% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just -% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), -% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean -% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we -% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. -% -% format.lab.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% if numnames > 1 then -% if numnames > 4 then -% namesleft := 3 -% else -% namesleft := numnames -% nameptr := 1 -% nameresult := "" -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% if (name_ptr = numnames) and -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else nameresult := nameresult * -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% if numnames > 4 then -% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else -% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token -% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) -% else -% nameresult := t -% fi -% fi -% return nameresult -% END -% -% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label -% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always -% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, -% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part -% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any -% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. -% -% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of -% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and -% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might -% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field -% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). -% -% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which -% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or -% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, -% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last -% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields -% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use -% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. -% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed -% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). -% -% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. -% -% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from -% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s -% until after sorting. -% -% calc.label == -% BEGIN -% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then -% author.editor.key.label -% else if type$ = "proceedings" then -% editor.key.organization.label -% else if type$ = "manual" then -% author.key.organization.label -% else -% author.key.label -% fi fi fi -% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) -% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label -% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits -% END -% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. -% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated -% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" -% come before "brinch hansen per". -% -% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by -% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization -% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on -% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title -% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). -% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. -% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank -% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves -% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, -% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), -% and four will separate year from title. -% -% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in -% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated -% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same -% as format.names. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted -% -% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's -% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward -% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass -% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there -% are 'b's). -% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -% -% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string -% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer -% -% initialize.longest.label == -% BEGIN -% longest.label := "" -% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) -% next.extra := "" -% longest.label.width := 0 -% last.extra.num := 0 -% END -% -% forward.pass == -% BEGIN -% if last.sort.label = sort.label then -% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 -% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) -% else -% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") -% extra.label := "" -% last.sort.label := sort.label -% fi -% END -% -% reverse.pass == -% BEGIN -% if next.extra = "b" then -% extra.label := "a" -% fi -% label := label * extra.label -% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then -% longest.label := label -% longest.label.width := width$(label) -% fi -% next.extra := extra.label -% END -% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. -% We use either the sorted order or original order. -% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -STRINGS { longest.label } -INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } -FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} -{ "" 'longest.label := - #1 'number.label := - #0 'longest.label.width := -} -FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} -{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := - number.label #1 + 'number.label := - label width$ longest.label.width > - { label 'longest.label := - label width$ 'longest.label.width := - } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} -ITERATE {longest.label.pass} -% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. -% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic -% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. -% Then we give an incantation containing the command -% \begin{thebibliography}{...} -% where the `...' is the longest label. -% -% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. -FUNCTION {begin.bib} -{ preamble$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {begin.bib} -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} -% Now we produce the output for all the entries -ITERATE {call.type$} -% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phnflet.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phnflet.bst deleted file mode 100644 index 4c7fc077908..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phnflet.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1883 +0,0 @@ -% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). -% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. - % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) - % of any bugs, improvements, etc. -% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written -% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put -% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles -% "C preprocessor" -% t) -% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with -% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx -% and run cpp with e.g., -% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> -% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. -% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) -% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles -% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last -% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. -% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles -% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles -% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers -% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) -% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles -% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles -% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets -% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles -% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries -% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. -% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals -% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation -% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note -% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) -% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. -% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" -% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels -% KEY_CITE: use key as label -% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations -% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps -% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name -% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. -% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections -% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. -% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. -% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to -% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. -% These are the original macros - % For Nuclear Fusion Letters -% same as NF except for 0 and 0 set to 5 -% This is the start of btxbst.doc -% BibTeX `plain' family - % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. - % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. - % Copying of this file is authorized only if either - % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or - % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than - % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. - % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. - % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. -% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in -% these standard styles or in this documentation file. -% -% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, -% and is also a template file that you can use to make -% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. -% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like -% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt -% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt -% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt -% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt -% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. -% If you don't have access, -% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, -% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. -% -% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain -% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence -% #if VAR -% lines to be included when VAR is not zero -% #else -% lines to be included when VAR is zero -% #endif -% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of -% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. -% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. -% Variables can be set by -% #define VAR value -% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef -% to see if it has none. -% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines -% after the #if only if VAR is zero. -% -% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables -% so you can spot them easily -% -% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA -% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), -% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the -% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. -% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. -% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: -% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric -% label is used) -% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) -% and other info, like authors (if false, then -% entries remain in order of occurrence) -% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as -% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first -% names become initials) -% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be -% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or -% first letter after a colon -% (if false then they appear as in the database) -% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then -% they're abbreviated) -% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full -% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently -% as they appear in ACM publications) -%# define PLAIN 1 -% -% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen -% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized -% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence -% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). -% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry -% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) -% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break -% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, -% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; -% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. -% -% Citation alphabetic label format: -% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) -% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors -% -% Citation label numberic format: -% [number] -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: -% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever -% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, -% then title -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: -% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes -% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title -% -% Reference list ordering for unsorted: -% by the order cited in the text -% -% History -% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. -% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. -% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. -% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. -% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. -% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: -% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; -% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. -% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: -% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; -% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; -% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace -% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; -% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; -% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; -% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a -% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; -% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; -% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just -% the fields they're supposed to; -% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; -% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. -% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; -% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow -% either volume or number, not just volume; -% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; -% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field -% to tell where a conference was held; -% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume -% or number, and also a series field; -% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than -% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; -% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; -% MANUAL now prints out the organization in -% the first block if the author field is empty; -% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. -% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three -% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this -% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the -% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. -% -% The ENTRY declaration -% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), -% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. -% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't -% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields -% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. -ENTRY -% Fields: - { address -% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. -% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the -% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major -% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, -% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry -% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if -% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. -% annote -% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). - author -% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. - booktitle -% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. -% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. - chapter -% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. - edition -% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). - editor -% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. -% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be -% for the book or collection that the work appears in. - howpublished -% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). - institution -% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. - journal -% Journal name (macros are provided for many). - key -% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key -% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). - month -% Month (macros are provided). - note -% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). - number -% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. - organization -% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if -% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces -% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately -% condensed organization information in the key field as well. - pages -% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' -% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). - publisher -% Publisher name. - school -% School name (for theses). - series -% The name of a series or set of books. -% An individual book will will also have it's own title. - title -% The title of the thing you're referred to. - type -% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of -% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a -% thesis; or of a part of a book. - volume -% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. - year -% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end -% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). - } -% There are no integer entry variables - {} -% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. -% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. - { label } -% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the -% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields -% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions -% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), -% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. -% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the -% entry. -% -% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': -% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent -% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than -% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to -% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should -% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be -% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is -% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two -% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between -% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two -% successive new.block's. -% -% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. -% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be -% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come -% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending -% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. -% -% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. -% It will be one of these values: -% before.all just after the \bibitem -% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed -% if more sentence is output -% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed -% after.block just after a block (and sentence): -% period and \newblock needed. -% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence -% -% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output -% -% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) -% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed -% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of -% occurrence. -% -% output.nonnull(s) == -% BEGIN -% s := argument on stack -% if output.state = mid.sentence then -% write$(pop() * ", ") -% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top -% else -% if output.state = after.block then -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% write$("\newblock ") -% else -% if output.state = before.all then -% write$(pop()) -% else -- output.state should be after.sentence -% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") -% fi -% fi -% output.state := mid.sentence -% fi -% push s on stack -% END -% -% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; -% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) -% -% output(s) == -% BEGIN -% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if -% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty -% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; -% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when -% such fields are empty). -% -% output.check(s,t) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) -% else output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry -% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator -% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack -% as per the output convention. -% -% output.bibitem == -% BEGIN -% newline$ -% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, -% write$(label) % these three lines -% write$("]{") % are used -% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels -% write$(cite$) -% write$("}") -% push "" on stack -% output.state := before.all -% END -% -% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the -% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all -% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, -% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the -% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) -% -% fin.entry == -% BEGIN -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% END -% -% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and -% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. -% -% new.block == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.block -% fi -% END -% -% new.sentence == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> after.block then -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.sentence -% fi -% fi -% END -% -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} -% the variables s and t are temporary string holders -STRINGS { s t } -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { "," * write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - "\bibitem{" write$ - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} -% This function finishes all entries. -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ skip$ -} -% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack -% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. -% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because -% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The -% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; -% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. -FUNCTION {new.block.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. -% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by -% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), -% or they produce the null string. -% -% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the -% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no -% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) -% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. -% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. -% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the -% stack is a string rather than a missing field. -% -% field.or.null(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return s -% END -% -% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, -% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic -% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation -% will follow the result. -% -% emphasize(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return "{\em " * s * "}" -% -% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in -% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas -% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last -% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always -% contain at least one name. -% -% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER -% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% format.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% nameptr := 1 -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% namesleft := numnames -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% % for full names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% % for abbreviated first names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% if nameptr > 1 then -% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t -% else if numnames > 2 -% then nameresult := nameresult * "," -% fi -% if t = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." -% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t -% fi -% fi -% else nameresult := t -% fi -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% return nameresult -% END -% -% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) -% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string -% -% format.authors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then return "" -% else return format.names(author) -% fi -% END -% -% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, -% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" -% -% format.editors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(editor) then return "" -% else -% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then -% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" -% else -% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" -% fi -% fi -% END -% -% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be -% given for them. -% -% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and -% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {embolden} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {paren} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "(" swap$ * ")" * } - if$ -} -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } -INTEGERS { etal } -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames #5 > - s numnames "{ll}" format.name$ "others" = numnames #5 > and - or 'etal := - etal - { #5 #1 + 'namesleft := } - { numnames 'namesleft := } - if$ - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first - t "others" = - 'skip$ - { t "u" change.case$ 't := } - if$ - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { nameptr #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - etal or - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { ", editors" * } - { ", editor" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. -% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, -% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), -% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; -% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - { title "t" change.case$ } - if$ -} -% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX -% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. -% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to -% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. -% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) -% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' -% if it's not already -% -% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% n.dashify(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% pageresult := "" -% while (not empty$(t)) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-") -% then -% if (next character isn't) -% then -% pageresult := pageresult * "--" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% else -% while (first character of t = "-") -% do -% pageresult := pageresult * "-" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% od -% fi -% else -% pageresult := pageresult * the first character -% t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return pageresult -% END -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {first.page} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ -} -% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if -% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string -% if they're both empty. -FUNCTION {format.date} -{ year empty$ - { "" } - 'year - if$ -} -% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like -% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title emphasize -} -% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a -% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). -% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two -% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between -% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: -% -% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == -% BEGIN -% if text.length$(str2) < 3 -% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 -% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 -% END -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} -% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair -% are nonempty. -% -% either.or.check(t,s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) -% fi -% END -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} -% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps -% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field -% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume -% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), -% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} -% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name -% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to -% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the -% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either -% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. -% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field -% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title -% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". -% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} -% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. -% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because -% this doesn't start a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book -% (and in rare circumstances, an article). -% -% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" -% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. -% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" -% -% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) -% -% multi.page.check(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% multiresult := false -% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") -% then multiresult := true -% else t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return multiresult -% END -INTEGERS { multiresult } -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} -% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. -% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check - { "pp." pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "p." pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.pages.a} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { "p." pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range -% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some -% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null embolden - " " swap$ * * - format.date empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.date paren } - { " " * format.date paren * } - if$ - } - if$ - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages.a } - { " " * pages first.page *} - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the -% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. -% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence -% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one -% exists. -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "in " booktitle emphasize * } - { "in " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and -% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. -FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} -{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ - month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ - and and and and and - { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, -% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack -% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} -% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" -% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; -% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. -% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "Technical Report" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because -% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving -% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature -% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled -% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for -% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; -% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; -% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Each of these is explained in more detail later. -% -% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is -% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- -% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be -% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). -% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry -% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. -% -% format.article.crossref == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(key) then -% if empty$(journal) then -% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * -% " to crossref " * crossref) -% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% else -% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * -% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% else -% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% END -% -% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ key empty$ - { journal empty$ - { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * - warning$ - "" - } - { "In " journal * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either -% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on -% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. -FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} -{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ - editor num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a -% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). -% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the -% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series -% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { series empty$ - { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" * - } - { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { key * } - if$ - } - { format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the -% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct -% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else -% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { booktitle empty$ - { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - } - { "In " format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear -% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These -% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for -% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the -% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. -% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, -% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. -% -% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may -% CROSSREF another article. -% Required fields: author, title, journal, year -% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note -% -% article == -% BEGIN -% output.bibitem -% output.check(format.authors,"author") -% new.block -% output.check(format.title,"title") -% new.block -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") -% output(format.vol.num.pages) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% else -% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) -% output(format.pages) -% fi -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. -% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year -% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, -% note -% -% book == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") -% else output.check(format.authors,"author") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) -% fi -% fi -% new.block -% output.check(format.btitle,"title") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output(format.bvolume) -% new.block -% output(format.number.series) -% new.sentence -% output.check(publisher,"publisher") -% output(address) -% else -% new.block -% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) -% fi -% output(format.edition) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal field.or.null - format.vol.num.pages output - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - howpublished address new.block.checkb - howpublished output - address output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. -% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. -% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field -% will come before number and series. -% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year -% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title -% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). -% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, -% address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may -% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) -% will appear just before note. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address empty$ - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - organization output - publisher output - } - if$ - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } -% A manual is technical documentation. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output.nonnull - address output - } - if$ - } - { format.authors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { address new.block.checka - address output - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - { organization address new.block.checkb - organization output - address output - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. -% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields -% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - title howpublished new.block.checkb - format.title output - howpublished new.block.checka - howpublished output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry - empty.misc.check -} -% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. -% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will -% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); -% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. -% Required: title, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - editor empty$ - { organization output } - { format.editors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address empty$ - { editor empty$ - { publisher new.sentence.checka } - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - } - if$ - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - editor empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output } - if$ - publisher output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A techreport is a technical report. -% Required: author, title, institution, year -% Optional: type, number, address, month, note -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - format.tr.number output.nonnull - institution "institution" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. -% Required: author, title, note -% Optional: month, year -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - format.date output - fin.entry -} -% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } -% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. -% Users are encouraged to use these macros. -% -% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated -MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} -MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} -MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} -MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} -MACRO {may} {"May"} -MACRO {jun} {"June"} -MACRO {jul} {"July"} -MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} -MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} -MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} -MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} -MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} -% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; -% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. -% -% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make -% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then -% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} -MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} -MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} -MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} -MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} -MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} -%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 -%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> -%% Change file names in leading comment -% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation -% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. -% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 -% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the -% corresponding changes to -% phyjabb.bib -% phyjabb.btx -MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} -MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} -MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} -MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} -MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} -MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} -MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} -MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} -MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} -MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} -MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} -MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} -MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} -MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} -MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} -MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} -MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} -MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} -MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} -MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} -MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} -MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} -MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} -MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} -MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} -MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} -MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} -MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} -MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} -MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} -MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} -MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} -MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} -MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} -MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} -MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} -MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} -MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} -MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} -MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} -MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} -MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} -MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} -MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} -MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} -MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} -% Now we read in the .BIB entries. -READ -% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's -% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting -% -% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len -% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the -% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels -% -% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of -% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, -% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; -% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). -% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just -% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), -% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean -% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we -% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. -% -% format.lab.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% if numnames > 1 then -% if numnames > 4 then -% namesleft := 3 -% else -% namesleft := numnames -% nameptr := 1 -% nameresult := "" -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% if (name_ptr = numnames) and -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else nameresult := nameresult * -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% if numnames > 4 then -% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else -% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token -% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) -% else -% nameresult := t -% fi -% fi -% return nameresult -% END -% -% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label -% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always -% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, -% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part -% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any -% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. -% -% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of -% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and -% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might -% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field -% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). -% -% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which -% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or -% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, -% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last -% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields -% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use -% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. -% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed -% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). -% -% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. -% -% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from -% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s -% until after sorting. -% -% calc.label == -% BEGIN -% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then -% author.editor.key.label -% else if type$ = "proceedings" then -% editor.key.organization.label -% else if type$ = "manual" then -% author.key.organization.label -% else -% author.key.label -% fi fi fi -% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) -% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label -% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits -% END -% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. -% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated -% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" -% come before "brinch hansen per". -% -% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by -% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization -% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on -% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title -% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). -% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. -% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank -% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves -% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, -% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), -% and four will separate year from title. -% -% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in -% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated -% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same -% as format.names. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted -% -% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's -% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward -% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass -% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there -% are 'b's). -% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -% -% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string -% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer -% -% initialize.longest.label == -% BEGIN -% longest.label := "" -% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) -% next.extra := "" -% longest.label.width := 0 -% last.extra.num := 0 -% END -% -% forward.pass == -% BEGIN -% if last.sort.label = sort.label then -% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 -% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) -% else -% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") -% extra.label := "" -% last.sort.label := sort.label -% fi -% END -% -% reverse.pass == -% BEGIN -% if next.extra = "b" then -% extra.label := "a" -% fi -% label := label * extra.label -% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then -% longest.label := label -% longest.label.width := width$(label) -% fi -% next.extra := extra.label -% END -% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. -% We use either the sorted order or original order. -% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -STRINGS { longest.label } -INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } -FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} -{ "" 'longest.label := - #1 'number.label := - #0 'longest.label.width := -} -FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} -{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := - number.label #1 + 'number.label := - label width$ longest.label.width > - { label 'longest.label := - label width$ 'longest.label.width := - } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} -ITERATE {longest.label.pass} -% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. -% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic -% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. -% Then we give an incantation containing the command -% \begin{thebibliography}{...} -% where the `...' is the longest label. -% -% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. -FUNCTION {begin.bib} -{ preamble$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {begin.bib} -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} -% Now we produce the output for all the entries -ITERATE {call.type$} -% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phpf.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phpf.bst deleted file mode 100644 index a55d62d9e35..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phpf.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1877 +0,0 @@ -% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). -% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. - % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) - % of any bugs, improvements, etc. -% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written -% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put -% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles -% "C preprocessor" -% t) -% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with -% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx -% and run cpp with e.g., -% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> -% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. -% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) -% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles -% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last -% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. -% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles -% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles -% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers -% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) -% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles -% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles -% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets -% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles -% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries -% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. -% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals -% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation -% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note -% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) -% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. -% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" -% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels -% KEY_CITE: use key as label -% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations -% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps -% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name -% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. -% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections -% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. -% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. -% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to -% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. -% These are the original macros - % For Physics of Fluids, which now wants ALL the authors - % (Same as AIP but infinite names, abbreviate pages, and - % alternate incollection) -% This is the start of btxbst.doc -% BibTeX `plain' family - % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. - % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. - % Copying of this file is authorized only if either - % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or - % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than - % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. - % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. - % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. -% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in -% these standard styles or in this documentation file. -% -% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, -% and is also a template file that you can use to make -% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. -% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like -% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt -% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt -% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt -% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt -% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. -% If you don't have access, -% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, -% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. -% -% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain -% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence -% #if VAR -% lines to be included when VAR is not zero -% #else -% lines to be included when VAR is zero -% #endif -% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of -% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. -% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. -% Variables can be set by -% #define VAR value -% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef -% to see if it has none. -% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines -% after the #if only if VAR is zero. -% -% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables -% so you can spot them easily -% -% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA -% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), -% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the -% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. -% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. -% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: -% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric -% label is used) -% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) -% and other info, like authors (if false, then -% entries remain in order of occurrence) -% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as -% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first -% names become initials) -% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be -% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or -% first letter after a colon -% (if false then they appear as in the database) -% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then -% they're abbreviated) -% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full -% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently -% as they appear in ACM publications) -%# define PLAIN 1 -% -% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen -% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized -% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence -% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). -% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry -% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) -% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break -% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, -% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; -% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. -% -% Citation alphabetic label format: -% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) -% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors -% -% Citation label numberic format: -% [number] -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: -% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever -% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, -% then title -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: -% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes -% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title -% -% Reference list ordering for unsorted: -% by the order cited in the text -% -% History -% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. -% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. -% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. -% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. -% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. -% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: -% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; -% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. -% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: -% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; -% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; -% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace -% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; -% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; -% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; -% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a -% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; -% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; -% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just -% the fields they're supposed to; -% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; -% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. -% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; -% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow -% either volume or number, not just volume; -% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; -% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field -% to tell where a conference was held; -% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume -% or number, and also a series field; -% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than -% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; -% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; -% MANUAL now prints out the organization in -% the first block if the author field is empty; -% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. -% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three -% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this -% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the -% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. -% -% The ENTRY declaration -% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), -% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. -% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't -% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields -% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. -ENTRY -% Fields: - { address -% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. -% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the -% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major -% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, -% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry -% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if -% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. -% annote -% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). - author -% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. - booktitle -% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. -% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. - chapter -% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. - edition -% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). - editor -% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. -% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be -% for the book or collection that the work appears in. - howpublished -% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). - institution -% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. - journal -% Journal name (macros are provided for many). - key -% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key -% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). - month -% Month (macros are provided). - note -% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). - number -% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. - organization -% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if -% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces -% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately -% condensed organization information in the key field as well. - pages -% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' -% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). - publisher -% Publisher name. - school -% School name (for theses). - series -% The name of a series or set of books. -% An individual book will will also have it's own title. - title -% The title of the thing you're referred to. - type -% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of -% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a -% thesis; or of a part of a book. - volume -% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. - year -% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end -% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). - } -% There are no integer entry variables - {} -% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. -% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. - { label } -% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the -% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields -% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions -% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), -% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. -% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the -% entry. -% -% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': -% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent -% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than -% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to -% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should -% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be -% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is -% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two -% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between -% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two -% successive new.block's. -% -% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. -% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be -% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come -% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending -% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. -% -% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. -% It will be one of these values: -% before.all just after the \bibitem -% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed -% if more sentence is output -% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed -% after.block just after a block (and sentence): -% period and \newblock needed. -% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence -% -% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output -% -% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) -% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed -% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of -% occurrence. -% -% output.nonnull(s) == -% BEGIN -% s := argument on stack -% if output.state = mid.sentence then -% write$(pop() * ", ") -% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top -% else -% if output.state = after.block then -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% write$("\newblock ") -% else -% if output.state = before.all then -% write$(pop()) -% else -- output.state should be after.sentence -% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") -% fi -% fi -% output.state := mid.sentence -% fi -% push s on stack -% END -% -% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; -% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) -% -% output(s) == -% BEGIN -% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if -% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty -% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; -% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when -% such fields are empty). -% -% output.check(s,t) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) -% else output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry -% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator -% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack -% as per the output convention. -% -% output.bibitem == -% BEGIN -% newline$ -% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, -% write$(label) % these three lines -% write$("]{") % are used -% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels -% write$(cite$) -% write$("}") -% push "" on stack -% output.state := before.all -% END -% -% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the -% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all -% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, -% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the -% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) -% -% fin.entry == -% BEGIN -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% END -% -% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and -% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. -% -% new.block == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.block -% fi -% END -% -% new.sentence == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> after.block then -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.sentence -% fi -% fi -% END -% -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} -% the variables s and t are temporary string holders -STRINGS { s t } -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { "," * write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - "\bibitem{" write$ - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} -% This function finishes all entries. -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ skip$ -} -% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack -% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. -% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because -% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The -% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; -% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. -FUNCTION {new.block.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. -% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by -% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), -% or they produce the null string. -% -% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the -% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no -% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) -% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. -% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. -% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the -% stack is a string rather than a missing field. -% -% field.or.null(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return s -% END -% -% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, -% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic -% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation -% will follow the result. -% -% emphasize(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return "{\em " * s * "}" -% -% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in -% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas -% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last -% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always -% contain at least one name. -% -% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER -% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% format.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% nameptr := 1 -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% namesleft := numnames -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% % for full names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% % for abbreviated first names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% if nameptr > 1 then -% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t -% else if numnames > 2 -% then nameresult := nameresult * "," -% fi -% if t = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." -% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t -% fi -% fi -% else nameresult := t -% fi -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% return nameresult -% END -% -% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) -% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string -% -% format.authors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then return "" -% else return format.names(author) -% fi -% END -% -% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, -% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" -% -% format.editors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(editor) then return "" -% else -% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then -% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" -% else -% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" -% fi -% fi -% END -% -% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be -% given for them. -% -% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and -% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {embolden} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {paren} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "(" swap$ * ")" * } - if$ -} -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { numnames #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { ", editors" * } - { ", editor" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.edited} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { "edited by " editor format.names * } - if$ -} -% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. -% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, -% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), -% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; -% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - { title "t" change.case$ } - if$ -} -% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX -% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. -% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to -% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. -% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) -% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' -% if it's not already -% -% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% n.dashify(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% pageresult := "" -% while (not empty$(t)) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-") -% then -% if (next character isn't) -% then -% pageresult := pageresult * "--" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% else -% while (first character of t = "-") -% do -% pageresult := pageresult * "-" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% od -% fi -% else -% pageresult := pageresult * the first character -% t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return pageresult -% END -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {first.page} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ -} -% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if -% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string -% if they're both empty. -FUNCTION {format.date} -{ year empty$ - { "" } - 'year - if$ -} -% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like -% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title emphasize -} -% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a -% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). -% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two -% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between -% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: -% -% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == -% BEGIN -% if text.length$(str2) < 3 -% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 -% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 -% END -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} -% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair -% are nonempty. -% -% either.or.check(t,s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) -% fi -% END -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} -% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps -% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field -% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume -% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), -% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} -% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name -% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to -% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the -% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either -% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. -% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field -% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title -% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". -% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} -% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. -% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because -% this doesn't start a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book -% (and in rare circumstances, an article). -% -% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" -% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. -% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" -% -% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) -% -% multi.page.check(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% multiresult := false -% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") -% then multiresult := true -% else t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return multiresult -% END -INTEGERS { multiresult } -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} -% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. -% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check - { "pp." pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "p." pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.pages.a} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { "p." pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range -% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some -% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null embolden - " " swap$ * * - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages.a } - { ", " * pages first.page * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the -% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. -% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence -% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one -% exists. -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "in " booktitle emphasize * } - { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and -% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. -FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} -{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ - month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ - and and and and and - { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, -% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack -% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} -% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" -% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; -% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. -% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "Technical Report" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because -% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving -% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature -% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled -% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for -% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; -% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; -% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Each of these is explained in more detail later. -% -% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is -% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- -% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be -% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). -% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry -% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. -% -% format.article.crossref == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(key) then -% if empty$(journal) then -% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * -% " to crossref " * crossref) -% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% else -% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * -% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% else -% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% END -% -% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ key empty$ - { journal empty$ - { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * - warning$ - "" - } - { "In " journal * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either -% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on -% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. -FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} -{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ - editor num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a -% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). -% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the -% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series -% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { series empty$ - { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" * - } - { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { key * } - if$ - } - { format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the -% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct -% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else -% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { booktitle empty$ - { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - } - { "In " format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear -% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These -% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for -% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the -% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. -% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, -% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. -% -% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may -% CROSSREF another article. -% Required fields: author, title, journal, year -% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note -% -% article == -% BEGIN -% output.bibitem -% output.check(format.authors,"author") -% new.block -% output.check(format.title,"title") -% new.block -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") -% output(format.vol.num.pages) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% else -% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) -% output(format.pages) -% fi -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. -% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year -% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, -% note -% -% book == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") -% else output.check(format.authors,"author") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) -% fi -% fi -% new.block -% output.check(format.btitle,"title") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output(format.bvolume) -% new.block -% output(format.number.series) -% new.sentence -% output.check(publisher,"publisher") -% output(address) -% else -% new.block -% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) -% fi -% output(format.edition) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal field.or.null - format.vol.num.pages - format.date empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.date paren } - { " " * format.date paren * } - if$ - } - if$ - output - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - howpublished address new.block.checkb - howpublished output - address output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. -% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. -% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field -% will come before number and series. -% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year -% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title -% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). -% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, -% address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages output - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may -% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) -% will appear just before note. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address empty$ - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - organization output - publisher output - } - if$ - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } -% A manual is technical documentation. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output.nonnull - address output - } - if$ - } - { format.authors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { address new.block.checka - address output - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - { organization address new.block.checkb - organization output - address output - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. -% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields -% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - title howpublished new.block.checkb - format.title output - howpublished new.block.checka - howpublished output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry - empty.misc.check -} -% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. -% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will -% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); -% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. -% Required: title, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - editor empty$ - { organization output } - { format.editors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address empty$ - { editor empty$ - { publisher new.sentence.checka } - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - } - if$ - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - editor empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output } - if$ - publisher output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A techreport is a technical report. -% Required: author, title, institution, year -% Optional: type, number, address, month, note -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - format.tr.number output.nonnull - institution "institution" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. -% Required: author, title, note -% Optional: month, year -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - format.date output - fin.entry -} -% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } -% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. -% Users are encouraged to use these macros. -% -% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated -MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} -MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} -MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} -MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} -MACRO {may} {"May"} -MACRO {jun} {"June"} -MACRO {jul} {"July"} -MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} -MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} -MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} -MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} -MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} -% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; -% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. -% -% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make -% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then -% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} -MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} -MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} -MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} -MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} -MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} -%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 -%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> -%% Change file names in leading comment -% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation -% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. -% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 -% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the -% corresponding changes to -% phyjabb.bib -% phyjabb.btx -MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} -MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} -MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} -MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} -MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} -MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} -MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} -MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} -MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} -MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} -MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} -MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} -MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} -MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} -MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} -MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} -MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} -MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} -MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} -MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} -MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} -MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} -MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} -MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} -MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} -MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} -MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} -MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} -MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} -MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} -MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} -MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} -MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} -MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} -MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} -MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} -MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} -MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} -MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} -MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} -MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} -MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} -MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} -MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} -MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} -MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} -% Now we read in the .BIB entries. -READ -% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's -% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting -% -% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len -% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the -% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels -% -% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of -% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, -% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; -% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). -% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just -% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), -% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean -% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we -% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. -% -% format.lab.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% if numnames > 1 then -% if numnames > 4 then -% namesleft := 3 -% else -% namesleft := numnames -% nameptr := 1 -% nameresult := "" -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% if (name_ptr = numnames) and -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else nameresult := nameresult * -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% if numnames > 4 then -% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else -% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token -% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) -% else -% nameresult := t -% fi -% fi -% return nameresult -% END -% -% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label -% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always -% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, -% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part -% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any -% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. -% -% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of -% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and -% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might -% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field -% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). -% -% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which -% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or -% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, -% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last -% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields -% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use -% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. -% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed -% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). -% -% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. -% -% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from -% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s -% until after sorting. -% -% calc.label == -% BEGIN -% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then -% author.editor.key.label -% else if type$ = "proceedings" then -% editor.key.organization.label -% else if type$ = "manual" then -% author.key.organization.label -% else -% author.key.label -% fi fi fi -% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) -% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label -% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits -% END -% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. -% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated -% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" -% come before "brinch hansen per". -% -% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by -% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization -% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on -% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title -% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). -% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. -% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank -% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves -% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, -% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), -% and four will separate year from title. -% -% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in -% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated -% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same -% as format.names. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted -% -% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's -% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward -% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass -% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there -% are 'b's). -% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -% -% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string -% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer -% -% initialize.longest.label == -% BEGIN -% longest.label := "" -% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) -% next.extra := "" -% longest.label.width := 0 -% last.extra.num := 0 -% END -% -% forward.pass == -% BEGIN -% if last.sort.label = sort.label then -% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 -% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) -% else -% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") -% extra.label := "" -% last.sort.label := sort.label -% fi -% END -% -% reverse.pass == -% BEGIN -% if next.extra = "b" then -% extra.label := "a" -% fi -% label := label * extra.label -% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then -% longest.label := label -% longest.label.width := width$(label) -% fi -% next.extra := extra.label -% END -% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. -% We use either the sorted order or original order. -% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -STRINGS { longest.label } -INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } -FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} -{ "" 'longest.label := - #1 'number.label := - #0 'longest.label.width := -} -FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} -{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := - number.label #1 + 'number.label := - label width$ longest.label.width > - { label 'longest.label := - label width$ 'longest.label.width := - } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} -ITERATE {longest.label.pass} -% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. -% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic -% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. -% Then we give an incantation containing the command -% \begin{thebibliography}{...} -% where the `...' is the longest label. -% -% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. -FUNCTION {begin.bib} -{ preamble$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {begin.bib} -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} -% Now we produce the output for all the entries -ITERATE {call.type$} -% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phppcf.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phppcf.bst deleted file mode 100644 index 2ca7056ef6e..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phppcf.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2009 +0,0 @@ -% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). -% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. - % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) - % of any bugs, improvements, etc. -% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written -% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put -% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles -% "C preprocessor" -% t) -% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with -% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx -% and run cpp with e.g., -% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> -% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. -% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) -% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles -% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last -% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. -% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles -% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles -% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers -% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) -% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles -% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles -% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets -% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles -% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries -% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. -% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals -% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation -% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note -% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) -% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. -% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" -% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels -% KEY_CITE: use key as label -% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations -% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps -% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name -% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. -% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections -% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. -% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. -% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to -% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. -% These are the original macros - % A physics version of APALIKE -% This is the start of btxbst.doc -% BibTeX `plain' family - % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. - % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. - % Copying of this file is authorized only if either - % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or - % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than - % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. - % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. - % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. -% BibTeX `apalike' bibliography style (24-Jan-88 version) -% Adapted from the `alpha' style, version 0.99a; for BibTeX version 0.99a. -% Copyright (C) 1988, all rights reserved. -% Copying of this file is allowed, provided that if you make any changes at all -% you name it something other than `apalike.bst'. -% This restriction helps ensure that all copies are identical. -% Differences between this style and `alpha' are generally heralded by a `%'. -% The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for alpha.bst. -% -% This style should be used with the `apalike' LaTeX style (apalike.sty). -% \cite's come out like "(Jones, 1986)" in the text but there are no labels -% in the bibliography, and something like "(1986)" comes out immediately -% after the author. Author (and editor) names appear as last name, comma, -% initials. A `year' field is required for every entry, and so is either -% an author (or in some cases, an editor) field or a key field. -% -% Editorial note: -% Many journals require a style like `apalike', but I strongly, strongly, -% strongly recommend that you not use it if you have a choice---use something -% like `plain' instead. Mary-Claire van Leunen (A Handbook for Scholars, -% Knopf, 1979) argues convincingly that a style like `plain' encourages better -% writing than one like `apalike'. Furthermore the strongest arguments for -% using an author-date style like `apalike'---that it's "the most practical" -% (The Chicago Manual of Style, University of Chicago Press, thirteenth -% edition, 1982, pages 400--401)---fall flat on their face with the new -% computer-typesetting technology. For instance page 401 anachronistically -% states "The chief disadvantage of [a style like `plain'] is that additions -% or deletions cannot be made after the manuscript is typed without changing -% numbers in both text references and list." LaTeX sidesteps the disadvantage. -% -% History: -% 15-sep-86 (SK,OP) Original version, by Susan King and Oren Patashnik. -% 10-nov-86 (OP) Truncated the sort.key$ string to the correct length -% in bib.sort.order to eliminate error message. -% 24-jan-88 (OP) Updated for BibTeX version 0.99a, from alpha.bst 0.99a; -% apalike now sorts by author, then year, then title; -% THIS `apalike' VERSION DOES NOT WORK WITH BIBTEX 0.98i. -% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in -% these standard styles or in this documentation file. -% -% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, -% and is also a template file that you can use to make -% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. -% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like -% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt -% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt -% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt -% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt -% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. -% If you don't have access, -% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, -% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. -% -% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain -% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence -% #if VAR -% lines to be included when VAR is not zero -% #else -% lines to be included when VAR is zero -% #endif -% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of -% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. -% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. -% Variables can be set by -% #define VAR value -% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef -% to see if it has none. -% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines -% after the #if only if VAR is zero. -% -% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables -% so you can spot them easily -% -% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA -% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), -% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the -% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. -% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. -% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: -% 1: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric -% label is used) -% 1: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) -% and other info, like authors (if false, then -% entries remain in order of occurrence) -% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as -% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first -% names become initials) -% 0: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be -% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or -% first letter after a colon -% (if false then they appear as in the database) -% 1: months are spelled out in full (if false, then -% they're abbreviated) -% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full -% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently -% as they appear in ACM publications) -%# define PLAIN 1 -% -% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen -% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized -% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence -% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). -% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry -% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) -% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break -% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, -% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; -% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. -% -% Citation alphabetic label format: -% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) -% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors -% -% Citation label numberic format: -% [number] -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: -% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever -% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, -% then title -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: -% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes -% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title -% -% Reference list ordering for unsorted: -% by the order cited in the text -% -% History -% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. -% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. -% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. -% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. -% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. -% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: -% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; -% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. -% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: -% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; -% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; -% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace -% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; -% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; -% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; -% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a -% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; -% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; -% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just -% the fields they're supposed to; -% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; -% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. -% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; -% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow -% either volume or number, not just volume; -% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; -% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field -% to tell where a conference was held; -% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume -% or number, and also a series field; -% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than -% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; -% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; -% MANUAL now prints out the organization in -% the first block if the author field is empty; -% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. -% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three -% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this -% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the -% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. -% -% The ENTRY declaration -% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), -% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. -% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't -% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields -% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. -ENTRY -% Fields: - { address -% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. -% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the -% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major -% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, -% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry -% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if -% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. -% annote -% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). - author -% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. - booktitle -% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. -% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. - chapter -% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. - edition -% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). - editor -% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. -% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be -% for the book or collection that the work appears in. - howpublished -% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). - institution -% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. - journal -% Journal name (macros are provided for many). - key -% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key -% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). -% month not used in apalike -% Month (macros are provided). - note -% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). - number -% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. - organization -% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if -% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces -% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately -% condensed organization information in the key field as well. - pages -% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' -% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). - publisher -% Publisher name. - school -% School name (for theses). - series -% The name of a series or set of books. -% An individual book will will also have it's own title. - title -% The title of the thing you're referred to. - type -% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of -% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a -% thesis; or of a part of a book. - volume -% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. - year -% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end -% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). - } -% There are no integer entry variables - {} -% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. -% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. - { label extra.label sort.label } -% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the -% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields -% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions -% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), -% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. -% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the -% entry. -% -% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': -% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent -% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than -% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to -% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should -% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be -% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is -% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two -% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between -% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two -% successive new.block's. -% -% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. -% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be -% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come -% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending -% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. -% -% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. -% It will be one of these values: -% before.all just after the \bibitem -% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed -% if more sentence is output -% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed -% after.block just after a block (and sentence): -% period and \newblock needed. -% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence -% -% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output -% -% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) -% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed -% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of -% occurrence. -% -% output.nonnull(s) == -% BEGIN -% s := argument on stack -% if output.state = mid.sentence then -% write$(pop() * ", ") -% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top -% else -% if output.state = after.block then -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% write$("\newblock ") -% else -% if output.state = before.all then -% write$(pop()) -% else -- output.state should be after.sentence -% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") -% fi -% fi -% output.state := mid.sentence -% fi -% push s on stack -% END -% -% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; -% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) -% -% output(s) == -% BEGIN -% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if -% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty -% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; -% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when -% such fields are empty). -% -% output.check(s,t) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) -% else output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry -% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator -% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack -% as per the output convention. -% -% output.bibitem == -% BEGIN -% newline$ -% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, -% write$(label) % these three lines -% write$("]{") % are used -% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels -% write$(cite$) -% write$("}") -% push "" on stack -% output.state := before.all -% END -% -% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the -% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all -% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, -% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the -% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) -% -% fin.entry == -% BEGIN -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% END -% -% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and -% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. -% -% new.block == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.block -% fi -% END -% -% new.sentence == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> after.block then -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.sentence -% fi -% fi -% END -% -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} -% the variables s and t are temporary string holders -STRINGS { s t } -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { add.period$ write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -% apalike needs this function because -% the year has special punctuation; -% apalike ignores the month -FUNCTION {output.year.check} -{ year empty$ - { "empty year in " cite$ * warning$ } - { write$ - " (" year * extra.label * ")" * - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - "\bibitem[" write$ - label write$ - "]{" write$ - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} -% This function finishes all entries. -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ output.state after.block = - 'skip$ - { output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.sentence 'output.state := } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack -% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. -% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because -% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The -% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; -% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. -% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by -% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), -% or they produce the null string. -% -% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the -% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no -% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) -% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. -% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. -% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the -% stack is a string rather than a missing field. -% -% field.or.null(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return s -% END -% -% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, -% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic -% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation -% will follow the result. -% -% emphasize(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return "{\em " * s * "}" -% -% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in -% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas -% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last -% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always -% contain at least one name. -% -% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER -% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% format.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% nameptr := 1 -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% namesleft := numnames -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% % for full names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% % for abbreviated first names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% if nameptr > 1 then -% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t -% else if numnames > 2 -% then nameresult := nameresult * "," -% fi -% if t = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." -% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t -% fi -% fi -% else nameresult := t -% fi -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% return nameresult -% END -% -% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) -% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string -% -% format.authors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then return "" -% else return format.names(author) -% fi -% END -% -% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, -% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" -% -% format.editors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(editor) then return "" -% else -% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then -% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" -% else -% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" -% fi -% fi -% END -% -% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be -% given for them. -% -% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and -% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {caps} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\sc " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {embolden} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr "{vv~}{ll}{, jj}{, f.}" format.name$ 't := % last name first - t "others" = - 'skip$ - { t caps 't := } - if$ - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { numnames #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - { " {\em et~al.}" * } - { " and " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.key} % this function is just for apalike -{ empty$ - { key field.or.null } - { "" } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { ", editors" * } - { ", editor" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. -% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, -% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), -% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; -% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - 'title - if$ -} -% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX -% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. -% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to -% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. -% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) -% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' -% if it's not already -% -% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% n.dashify(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% pageresult := "" -% while (not empty$(t)) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-") -% then -% if (next character isn't) -% then -% pageresult := pageresult * "--" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% else -% while (first character of t = "-") -% do -% pageresult := pageresult * "-" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% od -% fi -% else -% pageresult := pageresult * the first character -% t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return pageresult -% END -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} -% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like -% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title emphasize -} -% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a -% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). -% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two -% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between -% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: -% -% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == -% BEGIN -% if text.length$(str2) < 3 -% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 -% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 -% END -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} -% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair -% are nonempty. -% -% either.or.check(t,s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) -% fi -% END -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} -% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps -% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field -% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume -% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), -% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} -% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name -% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to -% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the -% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either -% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. -% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field -% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title -% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". -% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} -% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. -% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because -% this doesn't start a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book -% (and in rare circumstances, an article). -% -% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" -% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. -% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" -% -% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) -% -% multi.page.check(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% multiresult := false -% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") -% then multiresult := true -% else t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return multiresult -% END -INTEGERS { multiresult } -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} -% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. -% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check - { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range -% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some -% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null embolden - " " swap$ * * - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages } - { ", " * pages n.dashify * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the -% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. -% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence -% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one -% exists. -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "In " booktitle emphasize * } - { "In " format.editors * ", " * booktitle emphasize * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, -% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack -% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} -% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" -% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; -% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. -% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "Technical Report" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because -% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving -% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature -% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled -% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for -% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; -% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; -% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Each of these is explained in more detail later. -% -% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is -% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- -% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be -% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). -% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry -% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. -% -% format.article.crossref == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(key) then -% if empty$(journal) then -% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * -% " to crossref " * crossref) -% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% else -% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * -% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% else -% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% END -% -% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ "In" % this is for apalike - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a -% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). -% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the -% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series -% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - "\cite{" * crossref * "}" * % this is for apalike -} -% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the -% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct -% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else -% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ "In" % this is for apalike - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear -% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These -% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for -% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the -% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. -% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, -% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. -% -% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may -% CROSSREF another article. -% Required fields: author, title, journal, year -% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note -% -% article == -% BEGIN -% output.bibitem -% output.check(format.authors,"author") -% new.block -% output.check(format.title,"title") -% new.block -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") -% output(format.vol.num.pages) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% else -% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) -% output(format.pages) -% fi -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. -% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year -% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, -% note -% -% book == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") -% else output.check(format.authors,"author") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) -% fi -% fi -% new.block -% output.check(format.btitle,"title") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output(format.bvolume) -% new.block -% output(format.number.series) -% new.sentence -% output.check(publisher,"publisher") -% output(address) -% else -% new.block -% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) -% fi -% output(format.edition) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal emphasize - format.vol.num.pages output - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check - editor format.key output - } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - output.year.check % special for apalike - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - howpublished output - address output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. -% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. -% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field -% will come before number and series. -% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year -% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check - editor format.key output - } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - output.year.check % special for apalike - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title -% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). -% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, -% address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - format.edition output - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may -% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) -% will appear just before note. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address output % for apalike - new.sentence % there's no year - organization output % here so things - publisher output % are simpler - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } -% A manual is technical documentation. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - organization address new.block.checkb - organization output - address output - format.edition output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. -% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields -% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title output - new.block - howpublished output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. -% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will -% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); -% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. -% Required: title, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.editors output - editor format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address output % for apalike - new.sentence % we always output - organization output % a nonempty organization - publisher output % here - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A techreport is a technical report. -% Required: author, title, institution, year -% Optional: type, number, address, month, note -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - format.tr.number output.nonnull - institution "institution" output.check - address output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. -% Required: author, title, note -% Optional: month, year -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - author format.key output % special for - output.year.check % apalike - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - fin.entry -} -% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } -% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. -% Users are encouraged to use these macros. -% -% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated -MACRO {jan} {"January"} -MACRO {feb} {"February"} -MACRO {mar} {"March"} -MACRO {apr} {"April"} -MACRO {may} {"May"} -MACRO {jun} {"June"} -MACRO {jul} {"July"} -MACRO {aug} {"August"} -MACRO {sep} {"September"} -MACRO {oct} {"October"} -MACRO {nov} {"November"} -MACRO {dec} {"December"} -% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; -% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. -% -% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make -% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then -% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} -MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} -MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} -MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} -MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} -MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} -%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 -%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> -%% Change file names in leading comment -% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation -% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. -% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 -% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the -% corresponding changes to -% phyjabb.bib -% phyjabb.btx -MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} -MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} -MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} -MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} -MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} -MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} -MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} -MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} -MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} -MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} -MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} -MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} -MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} -MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} -MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} -MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} -MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} -MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} -MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} -MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} -MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} -MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} -MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} -MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} -MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} -MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} -MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} -MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} -MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} -MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} -MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} -MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} -MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} -MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} -MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} -MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} -MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} -MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} -MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} -MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} -MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} -MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} -MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} -MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} -MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} -MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} -% Now we read in the .BIB entries. -READ -% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's -% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting -% -% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len -% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the -% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. -FUNCTION {sortify} -{ purify$ - "l" change.case$ -} -INTEGERS { len } -FUNCTION {chop.word} -{ 's := - 'len := - s #1 len substring$ = - { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } - 's - if$ -} -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels -% -% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of -% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, -% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; -% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). -% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just -% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), -% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean -% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we -% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. -% -% format.lab.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% if numnames > 1 then -% if numnames > 4 then -% namesleft := 3 -% else -% namesleft := numnames -% nameptr := 1 -% nameresult := "" -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% if (name_ptr = numnames) and -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else nameresult := nameresult * -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% if numnames > 4 then -% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else -% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token -% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) -% else -% nameresult := t -% fi -% fi -% return nameresult -% END -% -% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label -% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always -% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, -% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part -% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any -% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. -% -% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of -% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and -% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might -% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field -% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). -% -% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which -% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or -% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, -% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last -% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields -% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use -% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. -% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed -% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). -% -% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. -% -% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from -% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s -% until after sorting. -% -% calc.label == -% BEGIN -% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then -% author.editor.key.label -% else if type$ = "proceedings" then -% editor.key.organization.label -% else if type$ = "manual" then -% author.key.organization.label -% else -% author.key.label -% fi fi fi -% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) -% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label -% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits -% END -% There are three apalike cases: one person (Jones), -% two (Jones and de~Bruijn), and more (Jones et~al.). -% This function is much like format.crossref.editors. -% -FUNCTION {format.lab.names} -{ 's := - s #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ caps - s num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " {\em et~al.}" * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " {\em et~al.}" * } - { " and " * s #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ caps * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {author.key.label} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - 'key % apalike uses the whole key - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} -{ author empty$ - { editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - 'key % apalike uses the whole key - if$ - } - { editor format.lab.names } - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {editor.key.label} -{ editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - 'key % apalike uses the whole key, no organization - if$ - } - { editor format.lab.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {calc.label} -{ type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.key.label - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.key.label % apalike ignores organization - 'author.key.label % for labeling and sorting - if$ - } - if$ - ", " % these three lines are - * % for apalike, which - year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ % uses all four digits - * - 'label := -} -% It doesn't seem like a particularly good idea to use an order-of-citation -% reference list when using alphabetic labels, but we need to have a -% special pass to calculate labels when this happens. -% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. -% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated -% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" -% come before "brinch hansen per". -% -% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by -% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization -% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on -% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title -% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). -% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. -% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank -% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves -% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, -% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), -% and four will separate year from title. -% -% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in -% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated -% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same -% as format.names. -FUNCTION {sort.format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - "" - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { nameptr #1 > - { " " * } - 'skip$ - if$ % apalike uses initials - s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := % <= here - nameptr numnames = t "others" = and - { "et al" * } - { t sortify * } - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -% The sort.format.title function returns the argument, -% but first any leading "A "'s, "An "'s, or "The "'s are removed. -% The chop.word function uses s, so we need another string variable, t -FUNCTION {sort.format.title} -{ 't := - "A " #2 - "An " #3 - "The " #4 t chop.word - chop.word - chop.word - sortify - #1 global.max$ substring$ -} -% The auxiliary functions here, for the presort function, are analogous to -% the ones for calc.label; the same comments apply, except that the -% organization field takes precedence here over the key field. For sorting -% purposes, we still remove a leading "The " from the organization field. -FUNCTION {author.sort} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} -{ author empty$ - { editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { editor sort.format.names } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {editor.sort} -{ editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need editor or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { editor sort.format.names } - if$ -} -% apalike uses two sorting passes; the first one sets the -% labels so that the `a's, `b's, etc. can be computed; -% the second pass puts the references in "correct" order. -% The presort function is for the first pass. It computes -% label, sort.label, and title, and then concatenates. -FUNCTION {presort} -{ calc.label - label sortify - " " - * - type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.sort - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.sort - 'author.sort - if$ - } - if$ - #1 entry.max$ substring$ % for - 'sort.label := % apalike - sort.label % style - * - " " - * - title field.or.null - sort.format.title - * - #1 entry.max$ substring$ - 'sort.key$ := -} -ITERATE {presort} -% And now we can sort -SORT % by label, sort.label, title---for final label calculation -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted -% -% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's -% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward -% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass -% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there -% are 'b's). -% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -% -% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string -% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer -% -% initialize.longest.label == -% BEGIN -% longest.label := "" -% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) -% next.extra := "" -% longest.label.width := 0 -% last.extra.num := 0 -% END -% -% forward.pass == -% BEGIN -% if last.sort.label = sort.label then -% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 -% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) -% else -% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") -% extra.label := "" -% last.sort.label := sort.label -% fi -% END -% -% reverse.pass == -% BEGIN -% if next.extra = "b" then -% extra.label := "a" -% fi -% label := label * extra.label -% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then -% longest.label := label -% longest.label.width := width$(label) -% fi -% next.extra := extra.label -% END -STRINGS { last.label next.extra } % apalike labels are only for the text; -INTEGERS { last.extra.num } % there are none in the bibliography -FUNCTION {initialize.extra.label.stuff} % and hence there is no `longest.label' -{ #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.label := - "" 'next.extra := - #0 'last.extra.num := -} -FUNCTION {forward.pass} -{ last.label label = - { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := - last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := - } - { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := - "" 'extra.label := - label 'last.label := - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {reverse.pass} -{ next.extra "b" = - { "a" 'extra.label := } - 'skip$ - if$ - label extra.label * 'label := - extra.label 'next.extra := -} -EXECUTE {initialize.extra.label.stuff} -ITERATE {forward.pass} -REVERSE {reverse.pass} -% Now that the label is right we sort for real, -% on sort.label then year then title. This is -% for the second sorting pass. -FUNCTION {bib.sort.order} -{ sort.label - " " - * - year field.or.null sortify - * - " " - * - title field.or.null - sort.format.title - * - #1 entry.max$ substring$ - 'sort.key$ := -} -ITERATE {bib.sort.order} -SORT % by sort.label, year, title---giving final bibliography order -% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. -% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic -% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. -% Then we give an incantation containing the command -% \begin{thebibliography}{...} -% where the `...' is the longest label. -% -% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. -FUNCTION {begin.bib} -{ preamble$ empty$ % no \etalchar in apalike - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - "\begin{thebibliography}{}" write$ newline$ % no labels in apalike -} -EXECUTE {begin.bib} -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} -% Now we produce the output for all the entries -ITERATE {call.type$} -% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phreport.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phreport.bst deleted file mode 100644 index 919ab181cb6..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phreport.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,1885 +0,0 @@ -% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). -% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. - % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) - % of any bugs, improvements, etc. -% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written -% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put -% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles -% "C preprocessor" -% t) -% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with -% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx -% and run cpp with e.g., -% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> -% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. -% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) -% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles -% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last -% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. -% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles -% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles -% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers -% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) -% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles -% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles -% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets -% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles -% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries -% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. -% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals -% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation -% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note -% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) -% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. -% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" -% RMP_LABELS: create RMP-style labels -% KEY_CITE: use key as label -% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations -% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps -% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name -% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. -% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections -% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. -% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. -% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to -% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. -% These are the original macros - % For internal reports -% same as AIP except for 0, 0, 0, -% 0, 0, 0 -% This is the start of btxbst.doc -% BibTeX `plain' family - % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. - % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. - % Copying of this file is authorized only if either - % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or - % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than - % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. - % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. - % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. -% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in -% these standard styles or in this documentation file. -% -% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, -% and is also a template file that you can use to make -% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. -% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like -% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt -% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt -% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt -% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt -% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. -% If you don't have access, -% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, -% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. -% -% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain -% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence -% #if VAR -% lines to be included when VAR is not zero -% #else -% lines to be included when VAR is zero -% #endif -% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of -% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. -% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. -% Variables can be set by -% #define VAR value -% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef -% to see if it has none. -% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines -% after the #if only if VAR is zero. -% -% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables -% so you can spot them easily -% -% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA -% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), -% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the -% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. -% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. -% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: -% 0: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric -% label is used) -% 0: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) -% and other info, like authors (if false, then -% entries remain in order of occurrence) -% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as -% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first -% names become initials) -% 0: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be -% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or -% first letter after a colon -% (if false then they appear as in the database) -% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then -% they're abbreviated) -% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full -% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently -% as they appear in ACM publications) -%# define PLAIN 1 -% -% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen -% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized -% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence -% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). -% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry -% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) -% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break -% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, -% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; -% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. -% -% Citation alphabetic label format: -% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) -% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors -% -% Citation label numberic format: -% [number] -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: -% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever -% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, -% then title -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: -% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes -% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title -% -% Reference list ordering for unsorted: -% by the order cited in the text -% -% History -% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. -% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. -% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. -% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. -% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. -% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: -% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; -% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. -% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: -% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; -% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; -% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace -% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; -% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; -% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; -% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a -% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; -% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; -% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just -% the fields they're supposed to; -% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; -% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. -% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; -% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow -% either volume or number, not just volume; -% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; -% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field -% to tell where a conference was held; -% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume -% or number, and also a series field; -% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than -% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; -% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; -% MANUAL now prints out the organization in -% the first block if the author field is empty; -% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. -% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three -% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this -% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the -% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. -% -% The ENTRY declaration -% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), -% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. -% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't -% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields -% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. -ENTRY -% Fields: - { address -% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. -% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the -% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major -% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, -% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry -% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if -% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. -% annote -% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). - author -% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. - booktitle -% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. -% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. - chapter -% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. - edition -% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). - editor -% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. -% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be -% for the book or collection that the work appears in. - howpublished -% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). - institution -% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. - journal -% Journal name (macros are provided for many). - key -% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key -% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). - month -% Month (macros are provided). - note -% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). - number -% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. - organization -% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if -% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces -% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately -% condensed organization information in the key field as well. - pages -% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' -% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). - publisher -% Publisher name. - school -% School name (for theses). - series -% The name of a series or set of books. -% An individual book will will also have it's own title. - title -% The title of the thing you're referred to. - type -% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of -% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a -% thesis; or of a part of a book. - volume -% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. - year -% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end -% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). - } -% There are no integer entry variables - {} -% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. -% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. - { label } -% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the -% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields -% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions -% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), -% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. -% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the -% entry. -% -% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': -% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent -% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than -% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to -% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should -% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be -% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is -% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two -% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between -% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two -% successive new.block's. -% -% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. -% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be -% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come -% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending -% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. -% -% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. -% It will be one of these values: -% before.all just after the \bibitem -% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed -% if more sentence is output -% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed -% after.block just after a block (and sentence): -% period and \newblock needed. -% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence -% -% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output -% -% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) -% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed -% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of -% occurrence. -% -% output.nonnull(s) == -% BEGIN -% s := argument on stack -% if output.state = mid.sentence then -% write$(pop() * ", ") -% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top -% else -% if output.state = after.block then -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% write$("\newblock ") -% else -% if output.state = before.all then -% write$(pop()) -% else -- output.state should be after.sentence -% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") -% fi -% fi -% output.state := mid.sentence -% fi -% push s on stack -% END -% -% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; -% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) -% -% output(s) == -% BEGIN -% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if -% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty -% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; -% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when -% such fields are empty). -% -% output.check(s,t) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) -% else output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry -% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator -% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack -% as per the output convention. -% -% output.bibitem == -% BEGIN -% newline$ -% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, -% write$(label) % these three lines -% write$("]{") % are used -% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels -% write$(cite$) -% write$("}") -% push "" on stack -% output.state := before.all -% END -% -% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the -% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all -% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, -% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the -% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) -% -% fin.entry == -% BEGIN -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% END -% -% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and -% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. -% -% new.block == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.block -% fi -% END -% -% new.sentence == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> after.block then -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.sentence -% fi -% fi -% END -% -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} -% the variables s and t are temporary string holders -STRINGS { s t } -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { "," * write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - "\bibitem{" write$ - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} -% This function finishes all entries. -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ skip$ -} -% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack -% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. -% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because -% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The -% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; -% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. -FUNCTION {new.block.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. -% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by -% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), -% or they produce the null string. -% -% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the -% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no -% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) -% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. -% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. -% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the -% stack is a string rather than a missing field. -% -% field.or.null(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return s -% END -% -% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, -% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic -% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation -% will follow the result. -% -% emphasize(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return "{\em " * s * "}" -% -% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in -% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas -% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last -% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always -% contain at least one name. -% -% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER -% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% format.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% nameptr := 1 -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% namesleft := numnames -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% % for full names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% % for abbreviated first names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% if nameptr > 1 then -% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t -% else if numnames > 2 -% then nameresult := nameresult * "," -% fi -% if t = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." -% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t -% fi -% fi -% else nameresult := t -% fi -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% return nameresult -% END -% -% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) -% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string -% -% format.authors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then return "" -% else return format.names(author) -% fi -% END -% -% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, -% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" -% -% format.editors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(editor) then return "" -% else -% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then -% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" -% else -% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" -% fi -% fi -% END -% -% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be -% given for them. -% -% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and -% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {embolden} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {paren} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "(" swap$ * ")" * } - if$ -} -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { numnames #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { ", editors" * } - { ", editor" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.edited} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { "edited by " editor format.names * } - if$ -} -% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. -% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, -% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), -% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; -% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - 'title - if$ -} -% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX -% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. -% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to -% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. -% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) -% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' -% if it's not already -% -% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% n.dashify(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% pageresult := "" -% while (not empty$(t)) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-") -% then -% if (next character isn't) -% then -% pageresult := pageresult * "--" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% else -% while (first character of t = "-") -% do -% pageresult := pageresult * "-" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% od -% fi -% else -% pageresult := pageresult * the first character -% t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return pageresult -% END -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} -% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if -% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string -% if they're both empty. -FUNCTION {format.date} -{ year empty$ - { month empty$ - { "" } - { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ - month - } - if$ - } - { month empty$ - 'year - { month " " * year * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like -% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title emphasize -} -% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a -% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). -% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two -% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between -% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: -% -% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == -% BEGIN -% if text.length$(str2) < 3 -% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 -% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 -% END -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} -% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair -% are nonempty. -% -% either.or.check(t,s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) -% fi -% END -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} -% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps -% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field -% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume -% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), -% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} -% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name -% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to -% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the -% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either -% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. -% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field -% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title -% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". -% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} -% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. -% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because -% this doesn't start a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book -% (and in rare circumstances, an article). -% -% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" -% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. -% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" -% -% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) -% -% multi.page.check(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% multiresult := false -% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") -% then multiresult := true -% else t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return multiresult -% END -INTEGERS { multiresult } -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} -% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. -% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check - { "pages" pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "page" pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range -% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some -% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null embolden - " " swap$ * * - number empty$ - 'skip$ - { "(" number * ")" * * - volume empty$ - { "there's a number but no volume in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages } - { ", " * pages n.dashify * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the -% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. -% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence -% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one -% exists. -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "in " booktitle emphasize * } - { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and -% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. -FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} -{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ - month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ - and and and and and - { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, -% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack -% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} -% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" -% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; -% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. -% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "Technical Report" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because -% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving -% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature -% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled -% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for -% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; -% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; -% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Each of these is explained in more detail later. -% -% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is -% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- -% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be -% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). -% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry -% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. -% -% format.article.crossref == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(key) then -% if empty$(journal) then -% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * -% " to crossref " * crossref) -% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% else -% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * -% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% else -% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% END -% -% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ key empty$ - { journal empty$ - { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * - warning$ - "" - } - { "In " journal * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either -% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on -% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. -FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} -{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ - editor num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a -% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). -% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the -% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series -% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { series empty$ - { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" * - } - { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { key * } - if$ - } - { format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the -% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct -% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else -% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { booktitle empty$ - { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - } - { "In " format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear -% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These -% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for -% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the -% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. -% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, -% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. -% -% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may -% CROSSREF another article. -% Required fields: author, title, journal, year -% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note -% -% article == -% BEGIN -% output.bibitem -% output.check(format.authors,"author") -% new.block -% output.check(format.title,"title") -% new.block -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") -% output(format.vol.num.pages) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% else -% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) -% output(format.pages) -% fi -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. -% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year -% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, -% note -% -% book == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") -% else output.check(format.authors,"author") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) -% fi -% fi -% new.block -% output.check(format.btitle,"title") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output(format.bvolume) -% new.block -% output(format.number.series) -% new.sentence -% output.check(publisher,"publisher") -% output(address) -% else -% new.block -% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) -% fi -% output(format.edition) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal field.or.null - format.vol.num.pages - format.date empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.date paren } - { " " * format.date paren * } - if$ - } - if$ - output - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - howpublished address new.block.checkb - howpublished output - address output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. -% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. -% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field -% will come before number and series. -% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year -% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title -% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). -% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, -% address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may -% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) -% will appear just before note. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address empty$ - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - organization output - publisher output - } - if$ - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } -% A manual is technical documentation. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output.nonnull - address output - } - if$ - } - { format.authors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { address new.block.checka - address output - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - { organization address new.block.checkb - organization output - address output - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. -% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields -% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - title howpublished new.block.checkb - format.title output - howpublished new.block.checka - howpublished output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry - empty.misc.check -} -% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. -% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will -% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); -% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. -% Required: title, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - editor empty$ - { organization output } - { format.editors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address empty$ - { editor empty$ - { publisher new.sentence.checka } - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - } - if$ - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - editor empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output } - if$ - publisher output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A techreport is a technical report. -% Required: author, title, institution, year -% Optional: type, number, address, month, note -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - format.tr.number output.nonnull - institution "institution" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. -% Required: author, title, note -% Optional: month, year -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - format.date output - fin.entry -} -% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } -% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. -% Users are encouraged to use these macros. -% -% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated -MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} -MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} -MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} -MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} -MACRO {may} {"May"} -MACRO {jun} {"June"} -MACRO {jul} {"July"} -MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} -MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} -MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} -MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} -MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} -% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; -% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. -% -% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make -% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then -% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} -MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} -MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} -MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} -MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} -MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} -%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 -%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> -%% Change file names in leading comment -% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation -% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. -% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 -% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the -% corresponding changes to -% phyjabb.bib -% phyjabb.btx -MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} -MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} -MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} -MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} -MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} -MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} -MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} -MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} -MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} -MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} -MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} -MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} -MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} -MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} -MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} -MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} -MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} -MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} -MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} -MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} -MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} -MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} -MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} -MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} -MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} -MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} -MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} -MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} -MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} -MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} -MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} -MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} -MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} -MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} -MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} -MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} -MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} -MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} -MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} -MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} -MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} -MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} -MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} -MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} -MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} -MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} -% Now we read in the .BIB entries. -READ -% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's -% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting -% -% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len -% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the -% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels -% -% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of -% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, -% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; -% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). -% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just -% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), -% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean -% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we -% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. -% -% format.lab.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% if numnames > 1 then -% if numnames > 4 then -% namesleft := 3 -% else -% namesleft := numnames -% nameptr := 1 -% nameresult := "" -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% if (name_ptr = numnames) and -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else nameresult := nameresult * -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% if numnames > 4 then -% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else -% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token -% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) -% else -% nameresult := t -% fi -% fi -% return nameresult -% END -% -% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label -% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always -% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, -% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part -% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any -% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. -% -% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of -% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and -% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might -% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field -% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). -% -% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which -% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or -% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, -% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last -% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields -% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use -% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. -% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed -% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). -% -% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. -% -% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from -% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s -% until after sorting. -% -% calc.label == -% BEGIN -% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then -% author.editor.key.label -% else if type$ = "proceedings" then -% editor.key.organization.label -% else if type$ = "manual" then -% author.key.organization.label -% else -% author.key.label -% fi fi fi -% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) -% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label -% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits -% END -% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. -% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated -% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" -% come before "brinch hansen per". -% -% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by -% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization -% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on -% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title -% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). -% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. -% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank -% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves -% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, -% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), -% and four will separate year from title. -% -% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in -% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated -% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same -% as format.names. -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted -% -% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's -% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward -% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass -% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there -% are 'b's). -% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -% -% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string -% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer -% -% initialize.longest.label == -% BEGIN -% longest.label := "" -% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) -% next.extra := "" -% longest.label.width := 0 -% last.extra.num := 0 -% END -% -% forward.pass == -% BEGIN -% if last.sort.label = sort.label then -% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 -% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) -% else -% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") -% extra.label := "" -% last.sort.label := sort.label -% fi -% END -% -% reverse.pass == -% BEGIN -% if next.extra = "b" then -% extra.label := "a" -% fi -% label := label * extra.label -% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then -% longest.label := label -% longest.label.width := width$(label) -% fi -% next.extra := extra.label -% END -% Now comes the computation for numeric labels. -% We use either the sorted order or original order. -% We still have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -STRINGS { longest.label } -INTEGERS { number.label longest.label.width } -FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} -{ "" 'longest.label := - #1 'number.label := - #0 'longest.label.width := -} -FUNCTION {longest.label.pass} -{ number.label int.to.str$ 'label := - number.label #1 + 'number.label := - label width$ longest.label.width > - { label 'longest.label := - label width$ 'longest.label.width := - } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} -ITERATE {longest.label.pass} -% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. -% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic -% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. -% Then we give an incantation containing the command -% \begin{thebibliography}{...} -% where the `...' is the longest label. -% -% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. -FUNCTION {begin.bib} -{ preamble$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {begin.bib} -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} -% Now we produce the output for all the entries -ITERATE {call.type$} -% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phrmp.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phrmp.bst deleted file mode 100644 index b6dd3b0d620..00000000000 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/phrmp.bst +++ /dev/null @@ -1,2150 +0,0 @@ -% BibTeX styles for various physics journals (27-Feb-1990). -% This file, physics.btx, is based on the file btxbst.doc. - % Please notify Charles Karney (Karney@Princeton.EDU) - % of any bugs, improvements, etc. -% Run this file through cpp to get specific versions. I have written -% a version of cpp within Emacs. To access it put -% (autoload 'cpp "tex$bibtex:cpp" ; Use cpp for BibTeX styles -% "C preprocessor" -% t) -% into your .emacs file. Read in this file with -% emacs tex$bibtex:physics.btx -% and run cpp with e.g., -% M-x cpp <ret> aip <ret> -% Save the resulting file to tex$latex:aip.bst. -% To accomodate the variations we need (in addition to the definitions below) -% ATIT_SUPPRESS: do not include the titles of journal articles -% NAME_INVERT: put the initials last -% NAME_UPPER: convert names to all caps. -% MONTH_SUPPRESS: do not include months in journal articles -% PAREN_DATE: dates go in parens in journal articles -% DATE_FIRST: dates go before page numbers -% VOLUME_SPACE: volume set off with space (not colon) -% NUM_SUPPRESS: do not include numbers in journal articles -% BOLD_VOL: volume numbers in bold face in journal articles -% BRACKET_NOTE: notes in brackets -% PAGE_START_J: include only starting page for journal articles -% PAGE_START_O: include only starting page for other entries -% PAGE_ABBREV: abbreviate page to p. and pages to pp. -% PHYSICS_JOUR: include abbreviations for Physics journals -% COMMA_DELIMIT: use comma (instead of period) to divide a citation -% NOTE_SUPPRESS: suppress the note -% MAX_NAMES: max number of authors before using et al (0 = infinity) -% MIN_NAMES: number of authors to list with et al. -% EDIT_VAR: use "edited by ..." instead of "..., editors" -% RMP_LABELS: create 1-style labels -% KEY_CITE: use key as label -% NAMED_REFS: use (Smith, 1988) style of citations -% CSC_NAMES: names set in caps and small caps -% JOUR_DEEMPH: don't emphasize journal name -% ETAL_EMPH: emphasize et al. -% ALT_INCOLL alternate ordering of fields in incollections -% These are all boolean (0 or 1) except for MAX_NAMES and MIN_NAMES. -% These need to satisfy 0 <= MIN_NAMES <= MAX_NAMES. -% The rule here is that if all these are defined to be zero, we revert to -% the standard styles. For that reason we initialize them all to 0. -% These are the original macros - % For Reviews of Modern Physics, -% except first name not inverted yet and order of fields not hacked -% This is the start of btxbst.doc -% BibTeX `plain' family - % version 0.99b for BibTeX versions 0.99a or later, LaTeX version 2.09. - % Copyright (C) 1985, all rights reserved. - % Copying of this file is authorized only if either - % (1) you make absolutely no changes to your copy, including name, or - % (2) if you do make changes, you name it something other than - % btxbst.doc, plain.bst, unsrt.bst, alpha.bst, and abbrv.bst. - % This restriction helps ensure that all standard styles are identical. - % The file btxbst.doc has the documentation for this style. -% Please notify Oren Patashnik (PATASHNIK@SCORE.STANFORD.EDU) of any bugs in -% these standard styles or in this documentation file. -% -% This is file btxbxt.doc; it helps document bibliography styles, -% and is also a template file that you can use to make -% several different style files, if you have access to a C preprocessor. -% For example, the standard styles were made by doing something like -% cpp -P -DPLAIN btxbst.doc plain.txt -% cpp -P -DUNSRT btxbst.doc unsrt.txt -% cpp -P -DALPHA btxbst.doc alpha.txt -% cpp -P -DABBRV btxbst.doc abbrv.txt -% and then renaming after removing unwanted comments and blank lines. -% If you don't have access, -% you can edit this file by hand to imitate the preprocessor, -% with the following explanation of the C preprocessor constructs used here. -% -% The output of the preprocessor is the same as the input, except that certain -% lines will be excluded (and some blank lines will be added). The sequence -% #if VAR -% lines to be included when VAR is not zero -% #else -% lines to be included when VAR is zero -% #endif -% (with the #-signs appearing in column 1) means that one set or the other of -% the lines are to be included depending on the value of VAR. -% The #else part is optional. Comments can be added after #else and #endif. -% Variables can be set by -% #define VAR value -% and one can also use #ifdef VAR to see if VAR has any value, and #ifndef -% to see if it has none. -% Another #if form used in this file is #if !VAR, which includes the lines -% after the #if only if VAR is zero. -% -% Convention: Use all uppercase identifiers for these preprocessor variables -% so you can spot them easily -% -% The command line to the preprocessor should define one of PLAIN, UNSRT, ALPHA -% or ABBRV (though PLAIN will be used by default if none is given), -% and the following lines will set various boolean variables to control the -% various lines that are chosen from the rest of the file. -% Each boolean variable should be set true (1) or false (0) in each style. -% Here are the current variables, and their meanings: -% 1: an alphabetic label is used (if false then a numeric -% label is used) -% 1: the entries should be sorted by label (if nonnumeric) -% and other info, like authors (if false, then -% entries remain in order of occurrence) -% 0: the authors, editors, etc., get the full names as -% given in the bibliography file (if false, the first -% names become initials) -% 1: titles of non-"books" (e.g., articles) should be -% converted to lower-case, except the first letter or -% first letter after a colon -% (if false then they appear as in the database) -% 0: months are spelled out in full (if false, then -% they're abbreviated) -% 0: macro journal names are spelled out in full -% (if false then they are abbreviated, currently -% as they appear in ACM publications) -%# define PLAIN 1 -% -% Entry formatting: Similar to that recommended by Mary-Claire van Leunen -% in "A Handbook for Scholars". Book-like titles are italicized -% (emphasized) and non-book titles are converted to sentence -% capitilization (and not enclosed in quotes). -% This file outputs a \newblock between major blocks of an entry -% (the name \newblock is analogous to the names \newline and \newpage) -% so that the user can obtain an "open" format, which has a line break -% before each block and lines after the first are indented within blocks, -% by giving the optional \documentstyle argument `openbib'; -% The default is the "closed" format---blocks runs together. -% -% Citation alphabetic label format: -% [Knu73] for single author (or editor or key) -% [AHU83] (first letters of last names) for multiple authors -% -% Citation label numberic format: -% [number] -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, alphabetic lables: -% alphabetical by citation label, then by author(s) or whatever -% passes for author in the absence of one, then by year, -% then title -% -% Reference list ordering for sorted, numeric lables: -% alphabetical by author(s) or whatever passes -% for author in the absence of one, then by year, then title -% -% Reference list ordering for unsorted: -% by the order cited in the text -% -% History -% 12/16/84 (HWT) Original `plain' version, by Howard Trickey. -% 12/23/84 (LL) Some comments made by Leslie Lamport. -% 2/16/85 (OP) Changes based on LL's comments, Oren Patashnik. -% 2/17/85 (HWT) Template file and other standard styles made. -% 3/28/85 (OP) First release, version 0.98b for BibTeX 0.98f. -% 5/ 9/85 (OP) Version 0.98c for BibTeX 0.98i: -% fixed Theoretical Computer Science macro name; -% fixed the format.vol.num.pages function. -% 1/24/88 (OP) Version 0.99a for BibTeX 0.99a, main changes: -% assignment operator (:=) arguments reversed; -% the preamble$ function outputs the database PREAMBLE; -% entry.max$ and global.max$ (built-in) variables replace -% entry.string.max and global.string.max functions; -% alphabetizing by year then title, not just title; -% many unnecessary ties removed; \it ==> \em; -% the `alpha' style uses a superscripted `+' instead of a -% `*' for unnamed names in constructing the label; -% the `abbrv' style now uses "Mar." and "Sept."; -% the functions calc.label and presort now look at just -% the fields they're supposed to; -% BOOKLET, MASTERSTHESIS, TECHREPORT use nonbook titles; -% INBOOK and INCOLLECTION take an optional type (e.g. -% type = "Section"), overriding the default "chapter"; -% BOOK, INBOOK, INCOLLECTION, and PROCEEDINGS now allow -% either volume or number, not just volume; -% INCOLLECTION now allows an edition and series field; -% PROCEEDINGS and INPROCEEDINGS now use the address field -% to tell where a conference was held; -% INPROCEEDINGS and PROCEEDINGS now allow either volume -% or number, and also a series field; -% MASTERSTHESIS and PHDTHESIS accept types other than -% "Master's thesis" and "PhD thesis"; -% UNPUBLISHED now outputs, in one block, note then date; -% MANUAL now prints out the organization in -% the first block if the author field is empty; -% MISC can't be empty---it requires some optional field. -% 3/23/88 (OP) Version 0.99b for BibTeX 0.99c---changed the three -% erroneous occurrences of `cite ' to `cite$ '; this -% change didn't affect the four standard styles, so the -% 0.99a versions of those styles are still current. -% -% The ENTRY declaration -% Like Scribe's (according to pages 231-2 of the April '84 edition), -% but no fullauthor or editors fields because BibTeX does name handling. -% The annote field is commented out here because this family doesn't -% include an annotated bibliography style. And in addition to the fields -% listed here, BibTeX has a built-in crossref field, explained later. -ENTRY -% Fields: - { address -% Usually the address of a publisher or other type of organization. -% Put information in this field only if it helps the reader find the -% thing---for example you should omit the address of a major -% publisher entirely. For a PROCEEDINGS or an INPROCEEDINGS, -% however, it's the address of the conference; for those two entry -% types, include the publisher's or organization's address, if -% necessary, in the publisher or organization field. -% annote -% Long annotation---for annotated bibliographies (begins sentence). - author -% Name(s) of author(s), in BibTeX name format. - booktitle -% Book title when the thing being referenced isn't the whole book. -% For book entries, the title field should be used instead. - chapter -% Chapter (or section or whatever) number. - edition -% Edition of a book---should be an ordinal (e.g., "Second"). - editor -% Name(s) of editor(s), in BibTeX name format. -% If there is also an author field, then the editor field should be -% for the book or collection that the work appears in. - howpublished -% How something strange has been published (begins sentence). - institution -% Sponsoring institution of a technical report. - journal -% Journal name (macros are provided for many). - key -% Alphabetizing, labeling, and cross-referencing key -% (needed when an entry has no author or editor). - month -% Month (macros are provided). - note -% To help the reader find a reference (begins sentence). - number -% Number of a journal or technical report, or of a work in a series. - organization -% Organization sponsoring a conference (or publishing a manual); if -% the editor (or author) is empty, and if the organization produces -% an awkward label or cross reference, you should put appropriately -% condensed organization information in the key field as well. - pages -% Page number or numbers (use `--' to separate a range, use `+' -% to indicate pages following that don't form a simple range). - publisher -% Publisher name. - school -% School name (for theses). - series -% The name of a series or set of books. -% An individual book will will also have it's own title. - title -% The title of the thing you're referred to. - type -% Type of a Techreport (e.g., "Research Note") to be used instead of -% the default "Technical Report"; or, similarly, the type of a -% thesis; or of a part of a book. - volume -% The volume number of a journal or multivolume work. - year -% The year should contain only numerals (technically, it should end -% with four numerals, after purification; doesn't a begin sentence). - } -% There are no integer entry variables - {} -% These string entry variables are used to form the citation label. -% In a storage pinch, sort.label can be easily computed on the fly. - { label extra.label sort.label } -% Each entry function starts by calling output.bibitem, to write the -% \bibitem and its arguments to the .BBL file. Then the various fields -% are formatted and printed by output or output.check. Those functions -% handle the writing of separators (commas, periods, \newblock's), -% taking care not to do so when they are passed a null string. -% Finally, fin.entry is called to add the final period and finish the -% entry. -% -% A bibliographic reference is formatted into a number of `blocks': -% in the open format, a block begins on a new line and subsequent -% lines of the block are indented. A block may contain more than -% one sentence (well, not a grammatical sentence, but something to -% be ended with a sentence ending period). The entry functions should -% call new.block whenever a block other than the first is about to be -% started. They should call new.sentence whenever a new sentence is -% to be started. The output functions will ensure that if two -% new.sentence's occur without any non-null string being output between -% them then there won't be two periods output. Similarly for two -% successive new.block's. -% -% The output routines don't write their argument immediately. -% Instead, by convention, that argument is saved on the stack to be -% output next time (when we'll know what separator needs to come -% after it). Meanwhile, the output routine has to pop the pending -% output off the stack, append any needed separator, and write it. -% -% To tell which separator is needed, we maintain an output.state. -% It will be one of these values: -% before.all just after the \bibitem -% mid.sentence in the middle of a sentence: comma needed -% if more sentence is output -% after.sentence just after a sentence: period needed -% after.block just after a block (and sentence): -% period and \newblock needed. -% Note: These styles don't use after.sentence -% -% VAR: output.state : INTEGER -- state variable for output -% -% The output.nonnull function saves its argument (assumed to be nonnull) -% on the stack, and writes the old saved value followed by any needed -% separator. The ordering of the tests is decreasing frequency of -% occurrence. -% -% output.nonnull(s) == -% BEGIN -% s := argument on stack -% if output.state = mid.sentence then -% write$(pop() * ", ") -% -- "pop" isn't a function: just use stack top -% else -% if output.state = after.block then -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% write$("\newblock ") -% else -% if output.state = before.all then -% write$(pop()) -% else -- output.state should be after.sentence -% write$(add.period$(pop()) * " ") -% fi -% fi -% output.state := mid.sentence -% fi -% push s on stack -% END -% -% The output function calls output.nonnull if its argument is non-empty; -% its argument may be a missing field (thus, not necessarily a string) -% -% output(s) == -% BEGIN -% if not empty$(s) then output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.check function is the same as the output function except that, if -% necessary, output.check warns the user that the t field shouldn't be empty -% (this is because it probably won't be a good reference without the field; -% the entry functions try to make the formatting look reasonable even when -% such fields are empty). -% -% output.check(s,t) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$("empty " * t * " in " * cite$) -% else output.nonnull(s) -% fi -% END -% -% The output.bibitem function writes the \bibitem for the current entry -% (the label should already have been set up), and sets up the separator -% state for the output functions. And, it leaves a string on the stack -% as per the output convention. -% -% output.bibitem == -% BEGIN -% newline$ -% write$("\bibitem[") % for alphabetic labels, -% write$(label) % these three lines -% write$("]{") % are used -% write$("\bibitem{") % this line for numeric labels -% write$(cite$) -% write$("}") -% push "" on stack -% output.state := before.all -% END -% -% The fin.entry function finishes off an entry by adding a period to the -% string remaining on the stack. If the state is still before.all -% then nothing was produced for this entry, so the result will look bad, -% but the user deserves it. (We don't omit the whole entry because the -% entry was cited, and a bibitem is needed to define the citation label.) -% -% fin.entry == -% BEGIN -% write$(add.period$(pop())) -% newline$ -% END -% -% The new.block function prepares for a new block to be output, and -% new.sentence prepares for a new sentence. -% -% new.block == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.block -% fi -% END -% -% new.sentence == -% BEGIN -% if output.state <> after.block then -% if output.state <> before.all then -% output.state := after.sentence -% fi -% fi -% END -% -INTEGERS { output.state before.all mid.sentence after.sentence after.block } -FUNCTION {init.state.consts} -{ #0 'before.all := - #1 'mid.sentence := - #2 'after.sentence := - #3 'after.block := -} -% the variables s and t are temporary string holders -STRINGS { s t } -FUNCTION {output.nonnull} -{ 's := - output.state mid.sentence = - { ", " * write$ } - { output.state after.block = - { "," * write$ - newline$ - "\newblock " write$ - } - { output.state before.all = - 'write$ - { add.period$ " " * write$ } - if$ - } - if$ - mid.sentence 'output.state := - } - if$ - s -} -FUNCTION {output} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - 'pop$ - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.check} -{ 't := - duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "empty " t * " in " * cite$ * warning$ } - 'output.nonnull - if$ -} -FUNCTION {output.bibitem} -{ newline$ - "\bibitem[" write$ - label write$ - "]{" write$ - cite$ write$ - "}" write$ - newline$ - "" - before.all 'output.state := -} -% This function finishes all entries. -FUNCTION {fin.entry} -{ add.period$ - write$ - newline$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block} -{ output.state before.all = - 'skip$ - { after.block 'output.state := } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence} -{ skip$ -} -% These three functions pop one or two (integer) arguments from the stack -% and push a single one, either 0 or 1. -% The 'skip$ in the `and' and `or' functions are used because -% the corresponding if$ would be idempotent -FUNCTION {not} -{ { #0 } - { #1 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {and} -{ 'skip$ - { pop$ #0 } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {or} -{ { pop$ #1 } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% Sometimes we begin a new block only if the block will be big enough. The -% new.block.checka function issues a new.block if its argument is nonempty; -% new.block.checkb does the same if either of its TWO arguments is nonempty. -FUNCTION {new.block.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.block.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.block - if$ -} -% The new.sentence.check functions are analogous. -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checka} -{ empty$ - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -FUNCTION {new.sentence.checkb} -{ empty$ - swap$ empty$ - and - 'skip$ - 'new.sentence - if$ -} -% Here are some functions for formatting chunks of an entry. -% By convention they either produce a string that can be followed by -% a comma or period (using add.period$, so it is OK to end in a period), -% or they produce the null string. -% -% A useful utility is the field.or.null function, which checks if the -% argument is the result of pushing a `missing' field (one for which no -% assignment was made when the current entry was read in from the database) -% or the result of pushing a string having no non-white-space characters. -% It returns the null string if so, otherwise it returns the field string. -% Its main (but not only) purpose is to guarantee that what's left on the -% stack is a string rather than a missing field. -% -% field.or.null(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return s -% END -% -% Another helper function is emphasize, which returns the argument emphazised, -% if that is non-empty, otherwise it returns the null string. Italic -% corrections aren't used, so this function should be used when punctation -% will follow the result. -% -% emphasize(s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then return "" -% else return "{\em " * s * "}" -% -% The format.names function formats the argument (which should be in -% BibTeX name format) into "First Von Last, Junior", separated by commas -% and with an "and" before the last (but ending with "et~al." if the last -% of multiple authors is "others"). This function's argument should always -% contain at least one name. -% -% VAR: nameptr, namesleft, numnames: INTEGER -% pseudoVAR: nameresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% format.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% nameptr := 1 -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% namesleft := numnames -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% % for full names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% % for abbreviated first names: -% t := format.name$(s, nameptr, "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}") -% if nameptr > 1 then -% if namesleft > 1 then nameresult := nameresult * ", " * t -% else if numnames > 2 -% then nameresult := nameresult * "," -% fi -% if t = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * " et~al." -% else nameresult := nameresult * " and " * t -% fi -% fi -% else nameresult := t -% fi -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% return nameresult -% END -% -% The format.authors function returns the result of format.names(author) -% if the author is present, or else it returns the null string -% -% format.authors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then return "" -% else return format.names(author) -% fi -% END -% -% Format.editors is like format.authors, but it uses the editor field, -% and appends ", editor" or ", editors" -% -% format.editors == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(editor) then return "" -% else -% if num.names$(editor) > 1 then -% return format.names(editor) * ", editors" -% else -% return format.names(editor) * ", editor" -% fi -% fi -% END -% -% Other formatting functions are similar, so no "comment version" will be -% given for them. -% -% The `pop$' in this function gets rid of the duplicate `empty' value and -% the `skip$' returns the duplicate field value -FUNCTION {field.or.null} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -FUNCTION {emphasize} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\em " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {embolden} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "{\bf " swap$ * "}" * } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {bracket} -{ duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ "" } - { "[" swap$ * "]" * } - if$ -} -INTEGERS { nameptr namesleft numnames } -FUNCTION {format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { s nameptr "{f.~}{vv~}{ll}{, jj}" format.name$ 't := - nameptr #1 > - { namesleft #1 > - { ", " * t * } - { numnames #2 > - { "," * } - 'skip$ - if$ - t "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * t * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - 't - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {format.authors} -{ author empty$ - { "" } - { author format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.editors} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { editor format.names - editor num.names$ #1 > - { ", editors" * } - { ", editor" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.edited} -{ editor empty$ - { "" } - { "edited by " editor format.names * } - if$ -} -% The format.title function is used for non-book-like titles. -% For most styles we convert to lowercase (except for the very first letter, -% and except for the first one after a colon (followed by whitespace)), -% and hope the user has brace-surrounded words that need to stay capitilized; -% for some styles, however, we leave it as it is in the database. -FUNCTION {format.title} -{ title empty$ - { "" } - { title "t" change.case$ } - if$ -} -% By default, BibTeX sets the global integer variable global.max$ to the BibTeX -% constant glob_str_size, the maximum length of a global string variable. -% Analogously, BibTeX sets the global integer variable entry.max$ to -% ent_str_size, the maximum length of an entry string variable. -% The style designer may change these if necessary (but this is unlikely) -% The n.dashify function makes each single `-' in a string a double `--' -% if it's not already -% -% pseudoVAR: pageresult: STRING (it's what's accumulated on the stack) -% -% n.dashify(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% pageresult := "" -% while (not empty$(t)) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-") -% then -% if (next character isn't) -% then -% pageresult := pageresult * "--" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% else -% while (first character of t = "-") -% do -% pageresult := pageresult * "-" -% t := t with the "-" removed -% od -% fi -% else -% pageresult := pageresult * the first character -% t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return pageresult -% END -FUNCTION {n.dashify} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not } - { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = - { t #1 #2 substring$ "--" = not - { "--" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - { { t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = } - { "-" * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ - } - if$ - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - if$ - } - while$ -} -FUNCTION {first.page} -{ 't := - "" - { t empty$ not t #1 #1 substring$ "-" = not and } - { t #1 #1 substring$ * - t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := - } - while$ -} -% The format.date function is for the month and year, but we give a warning if -% there's an empty year but the month is there, and we return the empty string -% if they're both empty. -FUNCTION {format.date} -{ year empty$ - { month empty$ - { "" } - { "there's a month but no year in " cite$ * warning$ - month - } - if$ - } - { month empty$ - 'year - { month " " * year * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.btitle is for formatting the title field when it is a book-like -% entry---the style used here keeps it in uppers-and-lowers and emphasizes it. -FUNCTION {format.btitle} -{ title emphasize -} -% For several functions we'll need to connect two strings with a -% tie (~) if the second one isn't very long (fewer than 3 characters). -% The tie.or.space.connect function does that. It concatenates the two -% strings on top of the stack, along with either a tie or space between -% them, and puts this concatenation back onto the stack: -% -% tie.or.space.connect(str1,str2) == -% BEGIN -% if text.length$(str2) < 3 -% then return the concatenation of str1, "~", and str2 -% else return the concatenation of str1, " ", and str2 -% END -FUNCTION {tie.or.space.connect} -{ duplicate$ text.length$ #3 < - { "~" } - { " " } - if$ - swap$ * * -} -% The either.or.check function complains if both fields or an either-or pair -% are nonempty. -% -% either.or.check(t,s) == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(s) then -% warning$(can't use both " * t * " fields in " * cite$) -% fi -% END -FUNCTION {either.or.check} -{ empty$ - 'pop$ - { "can't use both " swap$ * " fields in " * cite$ * warning$ } - if$ -} -% The format.bvolume function is for formatting the volume and perhaps -% series name of a multivolume work. If both a volume and a series field -% are there, we assume the series field is the title of the whole multivolume -% work (the title field should be the title of the thing being referred to), -% and we add an "of <series>". This function is called in mid-sentence. -FUNCTION {format.bvolume} -{ volume empty$ - { "" } - { "volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - 'skip$ - { " of " * series emphasize * } - if$ - "volume and number" number either.or.check - } - if$ -} -% The format.number.series function is for formatting the series name -% and perhaps number of a work in a series. This function is similar to -% format.bvolume, although for this one the series must exist (and the -% volume must not exist). If the number field is empty we output either -% the series field unchanged if it exists or else the null string. -% If both the number and series fields are there we assume the series field -% gives the name of the whole series (the title field should be the title -% of the work being one referred to), and we add an "in <series>". -% We capitilize Number when this function is used at the beginning of a block. -FUNCTION {format.number.series} -{ volume empty$ - { number empty$ - { series field.or.null } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { "number" } - { "Number" } - if$ - number tie.or.space.connect - series empty$ - { "there's a number but no series in " cite$ * warning$ } - { " in " * series * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { "" } - if$ -} -% The format.edition function appends " edition" to the edition, if present. -% We lowercase the edition (it should be something like "Third"), because -% this doesn't start a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.edition} -{ edition empty$ - { "" } - { output.state mid.sentence = - { edition "l" change.case$ " edition" * } - { edition "t" change.case$ " edition" * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.pages function is used for formatting a page range in a book -% (and in rare circumstances, an article). -% -% The multi.page.check function examines the page field for a "-" or "," or "+" -% so that format.pages can use "page" instead of "pages" if none exists. -% Note: global.max$ here means "take the rest of the string" -% -% VAR: multiresult: INTEGER (actually, a boolean) -% -% multi.page.check(s) == -% BEGIN -% t := s -% multiresult := false -% while ((not multiresult) and (not empty$(t))) -% do -% if (first character of t = "-" or "," or "+") -% then multiresult := true -% else t := t with the first character removed -% fi -% od -% return multiresult -% END -INTEGERS { multiresult } -FUNCTION {multi.page.check} -{ 't := - #0 'multiresult := - { multiresult not - t empty$ not - and - } - { t #1 #1 substring$ - duplicate$ "-" = - swap$ duplicate$ "," = - swap$ "+" = - or or - { #1 'multiresult := } - { t #2 global.max$ substring$ 't := } - if$ - } - while$ - multiresult -} -% This function doesn't begin a sentence so "pages" isn't capitalized. -% Other functions that use this should keep that in mind. -FUNCTION {format.pages} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { pages multi.page.check - { "pp." pages n.dashify tie.or.space.connect } - { "p." pages tie.or.space.connect } - if$ - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {format.pages.a} -{ pages empty$ - { "" } - { "p." pages first.page tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% The format.vol.num.pages function is for the volume, number, and page range -% of a journal article. We use the format: vol(number):pages, with some -% variations for empty fields. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.vol.num.pages} -{ volume field.or.null embolden - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { duplicate$ empty$ - { pop$ format.pages.a } - { ":" * pages first.page * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.chapter.pages, if the chapter is present, puts whatever is in the -% type field (or else "chapter" if type is empty) in front of a chapter number. -% It then appends the pages, if present. This doesn't begin a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.chapter.pages} -{ chapter empty$ - 'format.pages - { type empty$ - { "chapter" } - { type "l" change.case$ } - if$ - chapter tie.or.space.connect - pages empty$ - 'skip$ - { ", " * format.pages * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The format.in.ed.booktitle function is used for starting out a sentence -% that begins "In <booktitle>", putting an editor before the title if one -% exists. -FUNCTION {format.in.ed.booktitle} -{ booktitle empty$ - { "" } - { editor empty$ - { "in " booktitle emphasize * } - { "in " booktitle emphasize * ", " * format.edited * } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% The function empty.misc.check complains if all six fields are empty, and -% if there's been no sorting or alphabetic-label complaint. -FUNCTION {empty.misc.check} -{ author empty$ title empty$ howpublished empty$ - month empty$ year empty$ note empty$ - and and and and and - key empty$ not and - { "all relevant fields are empty in " cite$ * warning$ } - 'skip$ - if$ -} -% The function format.thesis.type returns either the (case-changed) type field, -% if it is defined, or else the default string already on the stack -% (like "Master's thesis" or "PhD thesis"). -FUNCTION {format.thesis.type} -{ type empty$ - 'skip$ - { pop$ - type "t" change.case$ - } - if$ -} -% The function format.tr.number makes a string starting with "Technical Report" -% (or type, if that field is defined), followed by the number if there is one; -% it returns the starting part (with a case change) even if there is no number. -% This is used at the beginning of a sentence. -FUNCTION {format.tr.number} -{ type empty$ - { "Technical Report" } - 'type - if$ - number empty$ - { "t" change.case$ } - { number tie.or.space.connect } - if$ -} -% Now come the cross-referencing functions (these are invoked because -% one entry in the database file(s) cross-references another, by giving -% the other entry's database key in a `crossref' field). This feature -% allows one or more titled things that are part of a larger titled -% thing to cross-reference the larger thing. These styles allow for -% five posibilities: (1) an ARTICLE may cross-reference an ARTICLE; -% (2) a BOOK, (3) INBOOK, or (4) INCOLLECTION may cross-reference a BOOK; -% or (5) an INPROCEEDINGS may cross-reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Each of these is explained in more detail later. -% -% An ARTICLE entry type may cross reference another ARTICLE (this is -% intended for when an entire journal is devoted to a single topic--- -% but since there is no JOURNAL entry type, the journal, too, should be -% classified as an ARTICLE but without the author and title fields). -% This will result in two warning messages for the journal's entry -% if it's included in the reference list, but such is life. -% -% format.article.crossref == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(key) then -% if empty$(journal) then -% warning$("need key or journal for " * cite$ * -% " to crossref " * crossref) -% return(" \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% else -% return("In " * emphazise.correct (journal) * -% " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% else -% return("In " * key * " \cite{" * crossref * "}") -% fi -% END -% -% The other cross-referencing functions are similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {format.article.crossref} -{ key empty$ - { journal empty$ - { "need key or journal for " cite$ * " to crossref " * crossref * - warning$ - "" - } - { "In " journal * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% We use just the last names of editors for a cross reference: either -% "editor", or "editor1 and editor2", or "editor1 et~al." depending on -% whether there are one, or two, or more than two editors. -FUNCTION {format.crossref.editor} -{ editor #1 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ - editor num.names$ duplicate$ - #2 > - { pop$ " et~al." * } - { #2 < - 'skip$ - { editor #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * editor #2 "{vv~}{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ -} -% A BOOK (or INBOOK) entry type (assumed to be for a single volume in a -% multivolume work) may cross reference another BOOK (the entire multivolume). -% Usually there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct the -% cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else the series -% field (since the series gives the title of the multivolume work). -FUNCTION {format.book.crossref} -{ volume empty$ - { "empty volume in " cite$ * "'s crossref of " * crossref * warning$ - "In " - } - { "Volume" volume tie.or.space.connect - " of " * - } - if$ - editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { series empty$ - { "need editor, key, or series for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" * - } - { "{\em " * series * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { key * } - if$ - } - { format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% An INCOLLECTION entry type may cross reference a BOOK (assumed to be the -% collection), or an INPROCEEDINGS may cross reference a PROCEEDINGS. -% Often there will be an editor, in which case we use that to construct -% the cross reference; otherwise we use a nonempty key field or else -% the booktitle field (which gives the cross-referenced work's title). -FUNCTION {format.incoll.inproc.crossref} -{ editor empty$ - editor field.or.null author field.or.null = - or - { key empty$ - { booktitle empty$ - { "need editor, key, or booktitle for " cite$ * " to crossref " * - crossref * warning$ - "" - } - { "In {\em " booktitle * "\/}" * } - if$ - } - { "In " key * } - if$ - } - { "In " format.crossref.editor * } - if$ - " \cite{" * crossref * "}" * -} -% Now we define the type functions for all entry types that may appear -% in the .BIB file---e.g., functions like `article' and `book'. These -% are the routines that actually generate the .BBL-file output for -% the entry. These must all precede the READ command. In addition, the -% style designer should have a function `default.type' for unknown types. -% Note: The fields (within each list) are listed in order of appearance, -% except as described for an `inbook' or a `proceedings'. -% -% The article function is for an article in a journal. An article may -% CROSSREF another article. -% Required fields: author, title, journal, year -% Optional fields: volume, number, pages, month, note -% -% article == -% BEGIN -% output.bibitem -% output.check(format.authors,"author") -% new.block -% output.check(format.title,"title") -% new.block -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output.check(emphasize(journal),"journal") -% output(format.vol.num.pages) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% else -% output.nonnull(format.article.crossref) -% output(format.pages) -% fi -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The book function is for a whole book. A book may CROSSREF another book. -% Required fields: author or editor, title, publisher, year -% Optional fields: volume or number, series, address, edition, month, -% note -% -% book == -% BEGIN -% if empty$(author) then output.check(format.editors,"author and editor") -% else output.check(format.authors,"author") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% either.or.check("author and editor",editor) -% fi -% fi -% new.block -% output.check(format.btitle,"title") -% if missing$(crossref) then -% output(format.bvolume) -% new.block -% output(format.number.series) -% new.sentence -% output.check(publisher,"publisher") -% output(address) -% else -% new.block -% output.nonnull(format.book.crossref) -% fi -% output(format.edition) -% output.check(format.date,"year") -% new.block -% output(note) -% fin.entry -% END -% -% The other entry functions are all quite similar, so no "comment version" -% will be given for them. -FUNCTION {article} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { journal "journal" output.check - format.vol.num.pages output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { format.article.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -FUNCTION {book} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A booklet is a bound thing without a publisher or sponsoring institution. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, howpublished, address, month, year, note -FUNCTION {booklet} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - howpublished address new.block.checkb - howpublished output - address output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% For the conference entry type, see inproceedings. -% An inbook is a piece of a book: either a chapter and/or a page range. -% It may CROSSREF a book. If there's no volume field, the type field -% will come before number and series. -% Required: author or editor, title, chapter and/or pages, publisher,year -% Optional: volume or number, series, type, address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {inbook} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { format.editors "author and editor" output.check } - { format.authors output.nonnull - crossref missing$ - { "author and editor" editor either.or.check } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - crossref missing$ - { format.bvolume output - format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.number.series output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - } - { format.chapter.pages "chapter and pages" output.check - new.block - format.book.crossref output.nonnull - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An incollection is like inbook, but where there is a separate title -% for the referenced thing (and perhaps an editor for the whole). -% An incollection may CROSSREF a book. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, publisher, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, type, chapter, pages, -% address, edition, month, note -FUNCTION {incollection} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.chapter.pages output - new.sentence - publisher "publisher" output.check - address output - format.edition output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.chapter.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An inproceedings is an article in a conference proceedings, and it may -% CROSSREF a proceedings. If there's no address field, the month (& year) -% will appear just before note. -% Required: author, title, booktitle, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, pages, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {inproceedings} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - crossref missing$ - { format.in.ed.booktitle "booktitle" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - format.pages output - address empty$ - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - organization output - publisher output - } - if$ - } - { format.incoll.inproc.crossref output.nonnull - format.pages output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% The conference function is included for Scribe compatibility. -FUNCTION {conference} { inproceedings } -% A manual is technical documentation. -% Required: title -% Optional: author, organization, address, edition, month, year, note -FUNCTION {manual} -{ output.bibitem - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output.nonnull - address output - } - if$ - } - { format.authors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { address new.block.checka - address output - } - 'skip$ - if$ - } - { organization address new.block.checkb - organization output - address output - } - if$ - format.edition output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A mastersthesis is a Master's thesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {mastersthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - "Master's thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A misc is something that doesn't fit elsewhere. -% Required: at least one of the `optional' fields -% Optional: author, title, howpublished, month, year, note -FUNCTION {misc} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors output - title howpublished new.block.checkb - format.title output - howpublished new.block.checka - howpublished output - format.date output - new.block - note output - fin.entry - empty.misc.check -} -% A phdthesis is like a mastersthesis. -% Required: author, title, school, year -% Optional: type, address, month, note -FUNCTION {phdthesis} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - new.block - "PhD thesis" format.thesis.type output.nonnull - school "school" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A proceedings is a conference proceedings. -% If there is an organization but no editor field, the organization will -% appear as the first optional field (we try to make the first block nonempty); -% if there's no address field, the month (& year) will appear just before note. -% Required: title, year -% Optional: editor, volume or number, series, address, month, -% organization, publisher, note -FUNCTION {proceedings} -{ output.bibitem - editor empty$ - { organization output } - { format.editors output.nonnull } - if$ - new.block - format.btitle "title" output.check - format.bvolume output - format.number.series output - address empty$ - { editor empty$ - { publisher new.sentence.checka } - { organization publisher new.sentence.checkb - organization output - } - if$ - publisher output - format.date "year" output.check - } - { address output.nonnull - format.date "year" output.check - new.sentence - editor empty$ - 'skip$ - { organization output } - if$ - publisher output - } - if$ - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% A techreport is a technical report. -% Required: author, title, institution, year -% Optional: type, number, address, month, note -FUNCTION {techreport} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - format.tr.number output.nonnull - institution "institution" output.check - address output - format.date "year" output.check - new.block - note output - fin.entry -} -% An unpublished is something that hasn't been published. -% Required: author, title, note -% Optional: month, year -FUNCTION {unpublished} -{ output.bibitem - format.authors "author" output.check - new.block - format.title "title" output.check - new.block - note "note" output.check - format.date output - fin.entry -} -% We use entry type `misc' for an unknown type; BibTeX gives a warning. -FUNCTION {default.type} { misc } -% Here are macros for common things that may vary from style to style. -% Users are encouraged to use these macros. -% -% Months are either written out in full or abbreviated -MACRO {jan} {"Jan."} -MACRO {feb} {"Feb."} -MACRO {mar} {"Mar."} -MACRO {apr} {"Apr."} -MACRO {may} {"May"} -MACRO {jun} {"June"} -MACRO {jul} {"July"} -MACRO {aug} {"Aug."} -MACRO {sep} {"Sept."} -MACRO {oct} {"Oct."} -MACRO {nov} {"Nov."} -MACRO {dec} {"Dec."} -% Journals are either written out in full or abbreviated; -% the abbreviations are like those found in ACM publications. -% -% To get a completely different set of abbreviations, it may be best to make -% a separate .bib file with nothing but those abbreviations; users could then -% include that file name as the first argument to the \bibliography command -MACRO {acmcs} {"ACM Comput. Surv."} -MACRO {acta} {"Acta Inf."} -MACRO {cacm} {"Commun. ACM"} -MACRO {ibmjrd} {"IBM J. Res. Dev."} -MACRO {ibmsj} {"IBM Syst.~J."} -MACRO {ieeese} {"IEEE Trans. Softw. Eng."} -MACRO {ieeetc} {"IEEE Trans. Comput."} -MACRO {ieeetcad} - {"IEEE Trans. Comput.-Aided Design Integrated Circuits"} -MACRO {ipl} {"Inf. Process. Lett."} -MACRO {jacm} {"J.~ACM"} -MACRO {jcss} {"J.~Comput. Syst. Sci."} -MACRO {scp} {"Sci. Comput. Programming"} -MACRO {sicomp} {"SIAM J. Comput."} -MACRO {tocs} {"ACM Trans. Comput. Syst."} -MACRO {tods} {"ACM Trans. Database Syst."} -MACRO {tog} {"ACM Trans. Gr."} -MACRO {toms} {"ACM Trans. Math. Softw."} -MACRO {toois} {"ACM Trans. Office Inf. Syst."} -MACRO {toplas} {"ACM Trans. Prog. Lang. Syst."} -MACRO {tcs} {"Theoretical Comput. Sci."} -%% /usr/local/lib/tex/bibtex/phyjfull.btx, Tue Jun 30 08:37:48 1992 -%% Edit by Nelson H. F. Beebe <beebe@alfred.math.utah.edu> -%% Change file names in leading comment -% Journal Title Abbreviations from the Physical Review Style and Notation -% Guide, July, 1983, in BAPS Vol. 28. -% Selected by Cris Barnes and Charles Karney, March 1988 -% IMPORTANT!! Don't make changes to this file without making the -% corresponding changes to -% phyjabb.bib -% phyjabb.btx -MACRO {advp} {"Advances in Physics"} -MACRO {ajp} {"American Journal of Physics"} -MACRO {ao} {"Applied Optics"} -MACRO {apl} {"Applied Physics Letters"} -MACRO {apj} {"Astrophysical Journal"} -MACRO {baps} {"Bulletin of the American Physical Society"} -MACRO {cpc} {"Computer Physics Communications"} -MACRO {cppcf} {"Comments on Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {fed} {"Fusion Engineering and Design"} -MACRO {ft} {"Fusion Technology"} -MACRO {ieeens} {"IEEE Transactions on Nuclear Science"} -MACRO {ieeeps} {"IEEE Transactions on Plasma Science"} -MACRO {ijimw} {"International Journal of Infrared and Millimeter Waves"} -MACRO {ip} {"Infrared Physics"} -MACRO {jap} {"Journal of Applied Physics"} -MACRO {jcp} {"Journal of Computational Physics"} -MACRO {jetp} {"Soviet Physics-JETP"} -MACRO {jfe} {"Journal of Fusion Energy"} -MACRO {jfm} {"Journal of Fluid Mechanics"} -MACRO {jgr} {"Journal of Geophysical Research"} -MACRO {jmp} {"Journal of Mathematical Physics"} -MACRO {jne} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy"} -MACRO {jnec} {"Journal of Nuclear Energy, Part C: Plasma Physics, Accelerators, Thermonuclear Research"} -MACRO {jnm} {"Journal of Nuclear Materials"} -MACRO {josa} {"Journal of the Optical Society of America"} -MACRO {jpp} {"Journal of Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {jpsj} {"Journal of the Physical Society of Japan"} -MACRO {jvst} {"Journal of Vacuum Science and Technology"} -MACRO {nedf} {"Nuclear Engineering and Design/Fusion"} -MACRO {nf} {"Nuclear Fusion"} -MACRO {nim} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods"} -MACRO {nimpr} {"Nuclear Instruments and Methods in Physics Research"} -MACRO {nt/f} {"Nuclear Technology/Fusion"} -MACRO {pf} {"Physics of Fluids"} -MACRO {pfa} {"Physics of Fluids A: Fluid Dynamics"} -MACRO {pfb} {"Physics of Fluids B: Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {pl} {"Physics Letters"} -MACRO {pla} {"Physics Letters A"} -MACRO {pnas} {"Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the USA"} -MACRO {pp} {"Plasma Physics"} -MACRO {ppcf} {"Plasma Physics and Controlled Fusion"} -MACRO {prl} {"Physical Review Letters"} -MACRO {pr} {"Physical Review"} -MACRO {pra} {"Physical Review A: General Physics"} -MACRO {ps} {"Physica Scripta"} -MACRO {rmp} {"Reviews of Modern Physics"} -MACRO {rsi} {"Review of Scientific Instruments"} -MACRO {sjpp} {"Soviet Journal of Plasma Phys."} -MACRO {spd} {"Soviet Physics-Doklady"} -MACRO {sptp} {"Soviet Physics-Technical Physics"} -MACRO {spu} {"Soviet Physics-Uspeki"} -% Now we read in the .BIB entries. -READ -% The sortify function converts to lower case after purify$ing; it's -% used in sorting and in computing alphabetic labels after sorting -% -% The chop.word(w,len,s) function returns either s or, if the first len -% letters of s equals w (this comparison is done in the third line of the -% function's definition), it returns that part of s after w. -FUNCTION {sortify} -{ purify$ - "l" change.case$ -} -INTEGERS { len } -FUNCTION {chop.word} -{ 's := - 'len := - s #1 len substring$ = - { s len #1 + global.max$ substring$ } - 's - if$ -} -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels -% -% The format.lab.names function makes a short label by using the initials of -% the von and Last parts of the names (but if there are more than four names, -% (i.e., people) it truncates after three and adds a superscripted "+"; -% it also adds such a "+" if the last of multiple authors is "others"). -% If there is only one name, and its von and Last parts combined have just -% a single name-token ("Knuth" has a single token, "Brinch Hansen" has two), -% we take the first three letters of the last name. The boolean -% et.al.char.used tells whether we've used a superscripted "+", so that we -% know whether to include a LaTeX macro for it. -% -% format.lab.names(s) == -% BEGIN -% numnames := num.names$(s) -% if numnames > 1 then -% if numnames > 4 then -% namesleft := 3 -% else -% namesleft := numnames -% nameptr := 1 -% nameresult := "" -% while namesleft > 0 -% do -% if (name_ptr = numnames) and -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}") = "others" -% then nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else nameresult := nameresult * -% format.name$(s, nameptr, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% nameptr := nameptr + 1 -% namesleft := namesleft - 1 -% od -% if numnames > 4 then -% nameresult := nameresult * "{\etalchar{+}}" -% et.al.char.used := true -% else -% t := format.name$(s, 1, "{v{}}{l{}}") -% if text.length$(t) < 2 then % there's just one name-token -% nameresult := text.prefix$(format.name$(s,1,"{ll}"),3) -% else -% nameresult := t -% fi -% fi -% return nameresult -% END -% -% Exactly what fields we look at in constructing the primary part of the label -% depends on the entry type; this selectivity (as opposed to, say, always -% looking at author, then editor, then key) helps ensure that "ignored" fields, -% as described in the LaTeX book, really are ignored. Note that MISC is part -% of the deepest `else' clause in the nested part of calc.label; thus, any -% unrecognized entry type in the database is handled correctly. -% -% There is one auxiliary function for each of the four different sequences of -% fields we use. The first of these functions looks at the author field, and -% then, if necessary, the key field. The other three functions, which might -% look at two fields and the key field, are similar, except that the key field -% takes precedence over the organization field (for labels---not for sorting). -% -% The calc.label function calculates the preliminary label of an entry, which -% is formed by taking three letters of information from the author or editor or -% key or organization field (depending on the entry type and on what's empty, -% but ignoring a leading "The " in the organization), and appending the last -% two characters (digits) of the year. It is an error if the appropriate fields -% among author, editor, organization, and key are missing, and we use -% the first three letters of the cite$ in desperation when this happens. -% The resulting label has the year part, but not the name part, purify$ed -% (purify$ing the year allows some sorting shenanigans by the user). -% -% This function also calculates the version of the label to be used in sorting. -% -% The final label may need a trailing 'a', 'b', etc., to distinguish it from -% otherwise identical labels, but we can't calculated those "extra.label"s -% until after sorting. -% -% calc.label == -% BEGIN -% if type$ = "book" or "inbook" then -% author.editor.key.label -% else if type$ = "proceedings" then -% editor.key.organization.label -% else if type$ = "manual" then -% author.key.organization.label -% else -% author.key.label -% fi fi fi -% label := label * substring$(purify$(field.or.null(year)), -1, 2) -% % assuming we will also sort, we calculate a sort.label -% sort.label := sortify(label), but use the last four, not two, digits -% END -INTEGERS { et.al.char.used } -FUNCTION {initialize.et.al.char.used} -{ #0 'et.al.char.used := -} -EXECUTE {initialize.et.al.char.used} -FUNCTION {format.lab.names} -{ 's := - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames #1 > - { numnames #2 > - { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ " et~al." * } - { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ - s #2 "{ff }{vv }{ll}{ jj}" format.name$ "others" = - { " et~al." * } - { " and " * s #2 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ * } - if$ - } - if$ - } - { s #1 "{vv }{ll}" format.name$ } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {author.key.label} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - { key #3 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {author.editor.key.label} -{ author empty$ - { editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - { key #3 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { editor format.lab.names } - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {author.key.organization.label} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { organization empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - { "The " #4 organization chop.word #9 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { key #3 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { author format.lab.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {editor.key.organization.label} -{ editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { organization empty$ - { cite$ #1 #3 substring$ } - { "The " #4 organization chop.word #9 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { key #3 text.prefix$ } - if$ - } - { editor format.lab.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {calc.label} -{ type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.key.label - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.key.organization.label - { type$ "manual" = - 'author.key.organization.label - 'author.key.label - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ - duplicate$ - " " * year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ - * - 'label := - year field.or.null purify$ #-1 #4 substring$ - * - sortify 'sort.label := -} -% It doesn't seem like a particularly good idea to use an order-of-citation -% reference list when using alphabetic labels, but we need to have a -% special pass to calculate labels when this happens. -% When sorting, we compute the sortkey by executing "presort" on each entry. -% The presort key contains a number of "sortify"ed strings, concatenated -% with multiple blanks between them. This makes things like "brinch per" -% come before "brinch hansen per". -% -% The fields used here are: the sort.label for alphabetic labels (as set by -% calc.label), followed by the author names (or editor names or organization -% (with a leading "The " removed) or key field, depending on entry type and on -% what's empty), followed by year, followed by the first bit of the title -% (chopping off a leading "The ", "A ", or "An "). -% Names are formatted: Von Last First Junior. -% The names within a part will be separated by a single blank -% (such as "brinch hansen"), two will separate the name parts themselves -% (except the von and last), three will separate the names, -% four will separate the names from year (and from label, if alphabetic), -% and four will separate year from title. -% -% The sort.format.names function takes an argument that should be in -% BibTeX name format, and returns a string containing " "-separated -% names in the format described above. The function is almost the same -% as format.names. -FUNCTION {sort.format.names} -{ 's := - #1 'nameptr := - "" - s num.names$ 'numnames := - numnames 'namesleft := - { namesleft #0 > } - { nameptr #1 > - { " " * } - 'skip$ - if$ % apalike uses initials - s nameptr "{vv{ } }{ll{ }}{ f{ }}{ jj{ }}" format.name$ 't := % <= here - nameptr numnames = t "others" = and - { "et al" * } - { t sortify * } - if$ - nameptr #1 + 'nameptr := - namesleft #1 - 'namesleft := - } - while$ -} -% The sort.format.title function returns the argument, -% but first any leading "A "'s, "An "'s, or "The "'s are removed. -% The chop.word function uses s, so we need another string variable, t -FUNCTION {sort.format.title} -{ 't := - "A " #2 - "An " #3 - "The " #4 t chop.word - chop.word - chop.word - sortify - #1 global.max$ substring$ -} -% The auxiliary functions here, for the presort function, are analogous to -% the ones for calc.label; the same comments apply, except that the -% organization field takes precedence here over the key field. For sorting -% purposes, we still remove a leading "The " from the organization field. -FUNCTION {author.sort} -{ author empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {author.editor.sort} -{ author empty$ - { editor empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author, editor, or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { editor sort.format.names } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {author.organization.sort} -{ author empty$ - { organization empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need author, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } - if$ - } - { author sort.format.names } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {editor.organization.sort} -{ editor empty$ - { organization empty$ - { key empty$ - { "to sort, need editor, organization, or key in " cite$ * warning$ - "" - } - { key sortify } - if$ - } - { "The " #4 organization chop.word sortify } - if$ - } - { editor sort.format.names } - if$ -} -% There is a limit, entry.max$, on the length of an entry string variable -% (which is what its sort.key$ is), so we take at most that many characters -% of the constructed key, and hope there aren't many references that match -% to that many characters! -FUNCTION {presort} -{ calc.label - sort.label - " " - * - type$ "book" = - type$ "inbook" = - or - 'author.editor.sort - { type$ "proceedings" = - 'editor.organization.sort - { type$ "manual" = - 'author.organization.sort - 'author.sort - if$ - } - if$ - } - if$ - * - " " - * - year field.or.null sortify - * - " " - * - title field.or.null - sort.format.title - * - #1 entry.max$ substring$ - 'sort.key$ := -} -ITERATE {presort} -% And now we can sort -SORT -% This long comment applies only to alphabetic labels, when sorted -% -% Now comes the final computation for alphabetic labels, putting in the 'a's -% and 'b's and so forth if required. This involves two passes: a forward -% pass to put in the 'b's, 'c's and so on, and a backwards pass -% to put in the 'a's (we don't want to put in 'a's unless we know there -% are 'b's). -% We have to keep track of the longest (in width$ terms) label, for use -% by the "thebibliography" environment. -% -% VAR: longest.label, last.sort.label, next.extra: string -% longest.label.width, last.extra.num: integer -% -% initialize.longest.label == -% BEGIN -% longest.label := "" -% last.sort.label := int.to.chr$(0) -% next.extra := "" -% longest.label.width := 0 -% last.extra.num := 0 -% END -% -% forward.pass == -% BEGIN -% if last.sort.label = sort.label then -% last.extra.num := last.extra.num + 1 -% extra.label := int.to.chr$(last.extra.num) -% else -% last.extra.num := chr.to.int$("a") -% extra.label := "" -% last.sort.label := sort.label -% fi -% END -% -% reverse.pass == -% BEGIN -% if next.extra = "b" then -% extra.label := "a" -% fi -% label := label * extra.label -% if width$(label) > longest.label.width then -% longest.label := label -% longest.label.width := width$(label) -% fi -% next.extra := extra.label -% END -STRINGS { longest.label last.sort.label next.extra } -INTEGERS { longest.label.width last.extra.num } -FUNCTION {initialize.longest.label} -{ "" 'longest.label := - #0 int.to.chr$ 'last.sort.label := - "" 'next.extra := - #0 'longest.label.width := - #0 'last.extra.num := -} -FUNCTION {forward.pass} -{ last.sort.label sort.label = - { last.extra.num #1 + 'last.extra.num := - last.extra.num int.to.chr$ 'extra.label := - } - { "a" chr.to.int$ 'last.extra.num := - "" 'extra.label := - sort.label 'last.sort.label := - } - if$ -} -FUNCTION {reverse.pass} -{ next.extra "b" = - { "a" 'extra.label := } - 'skip$ - if$ - label extra.label * 'label := - label width$ longest.label.width > - { label 'longest.label := - label width$ 'longest.label.width := - } - 'skip$ - if$ - extra.label 'next.extra := -} -EXECUTE {initialize.longest.label} -ITERATE {forward.pass} -REVERSE {reverse.pass} -% Now we're ready to start writing the .BBL file. -% We begin, if necessary, with a LaTeX macro for unnamed names in an alphabetic -% label; next comes stuff from the `preamble' command in the database files. -% Then we give an incantation containing the command -% \begin{thebibliography}{...} -% where the `...' is the longest label. -% -% We also call init.state.consts, for use by the output routines. -FUNCTION {begin.bib} -{ et.al.char.used - { "\newcommand{\etalchar}[1]{$^{#1}$}" write$ newline$ } - 'skip$ - if$ - preamble$ empty$ - 'skip$ - { preamble$ write$ newline$ } - if$ - "\begin{thebibliography}{" longest.label * "}" * write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {begin.bib} -EXECUTE {init.state.consts} -% Now we produce the output for all the entries -ITERATE {call.type$} -% Finally, we finish up by writing the `\end{thebibliography}' command. -FUNCTION {end.bib} -{ newline$ - "\end{thebibliography}" write$ newline$ -} -EXECUTE {end.bib} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/plainyr.bst b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/plainyr/plainyr.bst index f3afc319c2a..f3afc319c2a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/beebe/plainyr.bst +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/bibtex/bst/plainyr/plainyr.bst diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check index 8a0a28ec73a..54069e9e02c 100755 --- a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check +++ b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check @@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ my @TLP_working = qw( pictex pictex2 pictexsum piechartmp piff pigpen pinlabel pitex pittetd pixelart pkfix pkfix-helper pkgloader pkuthss pl placeat placeins placeins-plain - plain-doc plainpkg plari plantslabels plantuml plates + plain-doc plainpkg plainyr plari plantslabels plantuml plates platex platex-tools platexcheat plautopatch play playfair plex plex-otf plipsum plnfss plstmary plweb pm-isomath pmgraph pmx pmxchords pnas2009 diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds index fcf2b9e68c2..74ecee5ce44 100755 --- a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds +++ b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds @@ -847,6 +847,9 @@ chomp (my $ctan_root = `tlpkginfo --ctan-root`); 'mxd', "die 'skipping, noinfo license, old mongolian'", 'mxedruli', "&MAKEflatten", 'na-border', "die 'skipping, nonfree font'", + 'named', "die 'skipping, await request for old bst+sty'", + 'namunsrt', "die 'skipping, await request for old bst'", + 'newapa', "die 'skipping, await request for old bst+sty'", 'nanumtype1', "&MAKEflatten", 'nassflow', "die 'skipping, nosell license'", 'nbaskerv', "die 'skipping, requires nonfree font'", diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-bibtexextra.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-bibtexextra.tlpsrc index 68f0ee819e0..a0ce0db7f24 100644 --- a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-bibtexextra.tlpsrc +++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-bibtexextra.tlpsrc @@ -132,6 +132,7 @@ depend notes2bib depend notex-bst depend oscola depend perception +depend plainyr depend pnas2009 depend rsc depend showtags diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/plainyr.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/plainyr.tlpsrc new file mode 100644 index 00000000000..e69de29bb2d --- /dev/null +++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/plainyr.tlpsrc |